viii TJGAJ Vol. 11 No.1 JAN - 2016

i Samyoga ISSN 2231 - 3362 AN ACADEMIC JOURNAL

Samyoga in Sanskrit means union, an embodiment of the ethos and values that T. John Group of Institutions (TJGI) truly adheres to. This research journal contains articles from varied fields of research interest. Samyoga targets centers of higher education, research, science, technology, policy making and those that house individuals who want to work and make a difference in the field of human welfare. TJGI holds the copyright to all the articles contributed to its publications. In case of reprinted articles, TJGI holds the copyright for the selection, sequence, introduction of material, summaries and other value additions.

Patron & Honorary Editor Dr. Thomas. P. John Chairman, T. John Group of Institutions

Chief Editor Dr. Shikha Tiwari (Principal, T. John College)

Executive Editor Dr. Panchali Mukherjee (HoD & Assistant Professor-Department of Languages, T. John College)

Editorial Committee Advisory Board

Dr. AMN Yogi Dr. Nilanjana Basu (HoD & Professor-MCA, T. John Institute of Technology) (Vice Principal, T. John College) Suraiya Banu Shanawaz (Assistant Professor - English, T. John Dr. Bijoy Kumar Mishra College) (Principal, T. John Institute of Management & Bovina Sunath Science) (Assistant Professor – English & Journalism, T. John College) Prof. Gladish George Mridula Menon (Principal, T. John College of Nursing) (Assistant Professor - English, T. John College) Debajyoti Mal Pavithra R. (Assistant Professor - Psychology, T. John (Guest Editor, Content Manager, GCSC, College) Honeywell International (I) Pvt. Ltd.)

ii Published by T. John Group of Institutions Contents

Articles

Research Articles • Influence of Print, Visual and Social Media in Teaching English Deepa K. Narayanan & Bovina Sunath 1 • Influence of Various Polymers on Floating Matrix Tablets of Valsartan Dr. Ganesh N.S., Dr. Panner Selvam R. & Nithiya M. Thomas 11 • A Study to Evaluate the Effectiveness of Structured Teaching Programme on Knowledge and Attitude Regarding Junk Food and Their Hazards Among the P.U. Students Praveen T. P. 26

Research Integrated Learning Based Article A Study of Traditional Sri Lankan Batik Design and Application on Waistcoats for Men Hemalatha I. Doddamani & Kasun Seneviratne 41

Research Articles • Work-Life Balance: A Good Organizational Practice Lalitha P. 56 • Tamil Nadu Tourism Marketing from the Year 2011-2015: A Service Marketing Perspective K.P. Yuvraj & Jasty P. Joy 65 • Michael Addition of Chalcones with Ethylacetoacetate Using Grinding Method D. Visagaperumal 77 • The Politics of Gender and Social Constraint: Decoding the Challenges to Gender Equality Shilpa S. P. Singh 84 • The Personality Types of the Employees in Government and Private Sectors: A Study to Know the Personality Types of the Employees in Government and Private Sectors and the Reason for Choosing the Government or Private Sectors Respectively Pavithra R. 94

iii • The Interlock Model for Sustainable Economic Development – the Learning from Kerala and Gujarat Development Stories Gopan G. S. 126 • Opportunities and Challenges for Entrepreneurship for Make in India: Textiles' and Garments' Industry Hemalatha I. Doddamani 138 • Development and Validation of RP-HPLC Method for the Determination of Terbinafine Hydrochloride in a Tablet Dosage Form P. Ramya & D. Visagaperumal 149 • Development and Validation of RP-HPLC Method for the Determination of Amlodipine and Indapamide in a Tablet Dosage Form P. Shulamite Vatsalya & D. Visagaperumal 158 • Emerging Trend in Technical Textile- Application of Optical Fiber Fabric in Present Fashion Trend Tejashvi V. & Hemalatha I. Doddamani 168 • Digital India – A Unique Identity Jayaprabha M. & Felcy Judith 173 • Anti-Snake Venom Study on Root and Rhizome of Corallocarpus epigaeus [Rattle. ex. willd,] cl. C. Nisha Shri & J. Balaji 178 Review Articles • Natural Indicators Kinara Maheshwari 184 • Cyclooxygenase 3 Inhibition: A Probable Mechanism of Acetaminophen in Human- A Review Iswar Hazarika & Dr. Panner Selvam 205

iv Foreword

In today’s fast paced competitive world wherein every sector is focussing on research and development, the education sector cannot be lagging behind. Across the globe the hallmark of any reputed institute is the body of research work being generated by its academia.

A need is felt for constant research in various fields so the organizations are increasingly providing the much required support and impetus to their employees to take the plunge related to research.

The vision and mission of T. John Group of Institutions have always been aligned with the global views and trends related to academics, research and development. Samyoga, the annual journal published by our group of institutions is in accordance with this aim. It has been our constant endeavour to provide a platform to the researchers and the academicians to share their knowledge through their works with the readers. I appreciate the efforts put in by the editorial team of Samyoga in bringing out this issue. The team has focussed in bringing on board multi-disciplinary papers.I congratulate the contributors of this issue for successfully contributing the fruits of their research for the purpose of knowledge sharing.

I hope the journal attains the pinnacle of success with every passing year.

Dr. Thomas. P. John (Chairman, T. John Group of Institutions) Honorary Editor

v vi Editorial Preface

It gives me immense pleasure to welcome all of you to the eleventh edition of Samyoga, an academic journal of the T. John Group of Institutions for both the learned and also the enthusiastic learners. A decade old tradition of bringing out excellent academic research papers from various disciplines by both the subject experts and the budding research enthusiasts. This journal as its name suggests is an embodiment of the ethos and values that T. John Group of Institutions upholds and promotes in its members and stakeholders.

With the assistance of an efficient editorial committee which has over the years helped bring out successful editions of the journal has this year also succeeded in harnessing potential research papers and compile them into the form of a journal. It was a well-planned effort by the committee and the result has been an outstanding research journal.

A special thanks to our Honourable Editor, Chairman Dr. Thomas P. John, who has been the guiding light and pillar of support in the publication of this journal year after year and for encouraging the team to come out with fruitful editions of it. A much deserved appreciation to the editorial team who have meticulously pored over each research paper and helped compile the eleventh edition of Samyoga this year.

I convey my heartfelt appreciation to the contributors who have contributed to the various fields of research through their papers. This journal will perform as a knowledge sharing forum for all the research enthusiasts all over the country and I hope it will kindle in the readers an interest to take forward the tradition of innovation over set norms across various disciplines.

Dr. Shikha Tiwari (Principal, T. John College) Chief Editor

vii viii Editorial

The 11th edition of Samyoga keeping in line with its tradition showcases a varied range of articles by various researchers. The journal presents a diverse collection of research articles, an article based on research integrated learning, research articles presented in the national conference ‘IRISVE-15’ organised by the Department of Fashion and Apparel Design, T. John College and review articles exclusively from T. John College of Pharmacy.

The journal presents a collection of 18 research papers and review papers which are from diverse fields such as Pedagogy, Pharmacology, Nutrition and Dietary Habits, Fashion and Apparel Design, Organizational Behaviour, Tourism and Marketing, Gender Studies, Psychology, Economics related Growth, Entrepreneurship in Textiles and Garment Industry, Technical Textiles, Digital India and Natural Indicators. A fine example of ‘Research Integrated Learning’ which is a concept popularised among the academia in T. John Group of Institutions through sessions conducted by Centre for Teaching and Learning can be seen in a research paper based on Fashion and Apparel Design.

The 18 research papers not only provide insights into various fields by foregrounding the valuable research findings of talented researchers but also provide a review of the research that is currently being undertaken in Pharmacy/ Pharmacology thereby rendering the research findings in a simplistic way.

The journal is not only a knowledge sharing platform but also efficaciously serves the purpose of boosting the spirit of research in its readers by kindling the thirst of knowledge in them. We hope that the readers will read the articles in this journal with great enthusiasm and will be enlightened by the scope of these studies. We anticipate valuable feedback from our readers regarding all the papers that are published in this journal.

Dr. Panchali Mukherjee Executive Editor

ix x Influence of Print, Visual and Social Media in Teaching English Deepa K. Narayanan1 & Bovina Sunath2

Abstract

The paper aims to analyze the effect of media, especially print and social media, in teaching of English. With the advent of computers there is more weightage given to the American English. Any spelling is being accepted. The importance is just being given to the stylish way the language is spoken and grammar and syntax are put on the back burner. Convenience of auto spell check has affected the ability of the new generation to learn the correct spelling. The auto-editing mode has led today’s youngsters to become totally dependent on it. The magazines and newspapers seem to be the only sections of media which still use the ‘Queen’s Language’. There is a strong urge among the present generation to imitate the “cool” VJs of the television. The arrival of social media like Facebook and Whatsapp has resulted in the overuse of short forms. But knowing these abbreviations seems to be the need of the hour and people who cannot master the art seem to be totally out of place. It is exactly here that the English teachers can step in and help strike a balance between the younger generation and the older generation who are totally out of sync with the same.

Keywords: Print Media, Visual Media, Social Media, Queen’s English, American English, Australian English, Canadian English, Caribbean English and Indian English.

1. Lecturer, Department of English, Amrita School of Engineering, Bangalore 2. Assistant Professor, Department of Languages, T. John College, Bangalore

1 Introduction: English as an International Language:

English is the global lingua franca and it is the official language of 60 countries. It is the main language of many countries like the United States, United Kingdom, Australia, Ireland, New Zealand and many Caribbean nations. Many countries learn English as a second language as well. Even our country India has accepted English as one of the official languages. It is the official language of many world organizations.

As we all know English has gone through a lot of transformations to acquire its current form and structure. In fact like any other language English is still in the process of transformation and development. The language has always pushed its boundaries to accept new words in order to enrich its vocabulary. The language has various variations like the American English, African English, Australian English, Indian English and the British English. If one had to focus on the perfect form of English it would be a task which would be almost impossible. But it goes without saying that learning English is the need of the hour. Just learning or knowing the language is not enough. Mastery of the language is what is required in these days. We saw in the recent blockbuster English Vinglish how a homemaker suffers and is being made fun of because of the simple reason that she cannot converse in English. This is the state of many non-native speakers of the language. But the world seems to be moving forward with people who know the language and this is exactly why there is a mad rush to learn the language.

As mentioned at the outset of this paper English is still in the stages of expansion. It has been generous in accepting words from many languages. The English language has borrowed or has been given and has created words for more than 2000 years. The typical Indian words such as ‘Guru’, ‘Mantra’ and ‘Karma’ are now a part of English and are being used by people all over the world.

English just like the postcolonial literature has allowed itself to be fragmented. The result of this fragmentation is evident in the off shoot of the genre “English for Specific Purposes” (ESP). A lot of research is being carried out in this field that English has been divided into legal, business, medical and technical English. Not only English teachers but also even those who teach other subjects have to be competent in the language because this would enable them to teach the students the nuances of the trade. An engineering faculty member should have some knowledge of technical communication, a professor of law should at least know the basics of legal English and a management faculty should be in a position to impart the basic lessons of business communication. This calls for

2 continuous professional development in the field of academics because as they say if teachers don’t update themselves they would soon be outdated.

The very presence of an English department in Engineering, Management and Law colleges asserts the fact that it is impossible for a professional to survive in the industry without gaining mastery over the language. One might wonder if this was the case some three decades back thanks to the IT sector and the business market of the whole world coming under the same umbrella. There is a constant need for an IT or a management professional to communicate with clients and customers across the globe. As we all would agree we live in a virtual world where the software developer would be seated in a cubicle in India, the manager in the United States and the client in Australia. Communication would happen over the phone, via email or through chat windows. So the English should not be Australian, Indian or American. This is why the demand of learning neutral English is very strong these days.

This paper aims to analyze the influence that print, social and visual media has had in the development and the teaching of English. We live in an era when so many words creep into the language on a daily basis. The words and slangs that are to be used and those that are not to be used is purely subjective. This lack of uniformity has posed a lot of challenges to the users of the language. The print, visual and the social media play a vital role in the evolution of the language. Gone are the days when we had to wait for the newsreader of the All India Radio or the newspaper boy for the latest news. Everything that happens around the globe gets updated in the social media and the visual media within seconds and there is no uniform code or protocol that has to be followed in terms of language used. This actually has given the young generation of today the liberty to use the language, spelling and grammar the way they want to. American English especially has become widely accepted as it sounds very stylish and ‘cool’. The American accent has also been blindly imitated. The popularity of the Hollywood movies has paved way for the same. American English has always chosen the easier path when it comes to spellings and grammar. For instance nowhere in America a child specialist’s board would say “Paediatrician”, it would be “Pediatrician”. The question arises if we should still stick to the old spelling or choose to spell in an easier way. But if we decide on the latter, who would control the uniformity of the spellings? Wouldn’t we end up using different spellings and wouldn’t each word have multiple spellings? Wouldn’t that put us in a spot where none of us would know the correct spelling of a particular word. This is exactly what is happening to the vocabulary, grammar and syntax of English these days. “How is you?” has become very popular among youngsters these days. It might irritate a Grammar Nazi to the core. There are youngsters who would find “How are you?” totally outdated. Isn’t this trend resulting in a destructive deconstruction

3 of the language where anything and everything is considered correct? The paper further analyzes the effect of print, visual and social media in the shaping and teaching of English language. Influence of Print Media in Teaching English:

The grammar books and dictionaries of the 16th century have played a very important role in shaping of the English language. Printing press made copies of books available to the layman and thus books which were accessible only to the clergy and the higher classes became available to all. The print media reflects the culture of a particular place as well. Each newspaper and magazine has its own style and way of writing, so the language used is also a reflection of the organization’s culture. “The media reflect all aspects of the human condition and makes available to the public many varieties of language already well known elsewhere such as those associated with religion, politics, science, literature and the more topic-directed aspects of conversation (e.g. discussion, interview, debate, argument, letter)”. In other words, newspapers adapt their language to the kind of topics they deal with. Thus, the scientific magazines like The National Geographic use a scientific language. But the newspapers do not only tailor their language to the topics but also to the readership they want to attract. Therefore, tabloids like The Sun are written in a simple language with large catchy headlines and many coloured pictures. The Sun is supposed to be read by working class people and Tory supporters whereas more serious papers like The Guardian and The Times are expected to be read by left-wing, middle-class Labour supporters (Englishlangaugelearningforum.blogspot.in).

In a recent survey held among the faculty members of Amrita School of Engineering, Bangalore, all the participants said that the print media has influenced their learning of the language wherein 60% of the students confessed that they don’t read newspapers. The statistics makes it evident that the present generation does not read newspapers like the older generation. Reading is no more a favorite hobby of the Gen Y. Gone are the days when students would get lost reading Wuthering Heights or soar in the world of imagination with Keats. Video games and play stations have found place in the hands of little kids while kids born a decade ago would have enjoyed Alice in Wonderland or works of Roald Dahl. This is exactly one of the challenges English teachers face, that is, to put books and sensible written material back into the hands of the students. It has to be agreed without debate “Reading maketh a full man”. Queen’s English nowadays is to be seen only in the newspapers, a few magazines and in the works of certain authors. This is said keeping in mind the fact that not all the newspapers are carriers of unpolluted English.

4 Jonathan Douglas in his article “The importance of instilling a need to read” says that reading for pleasure at the age of 15 is a strong factor in determining future social mobility. Indeed, it has been revealed as the most important indicator of the future success of the child”. Douglas quotes the finding of a research carried out by the ‘Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development’ on education and reading. Teachers, especially language teachers have a great responsibility in instilling the interest for reading. This could be a very tough task as students have a wide variety of activities to choose from. The teachers should be able to make the students understand the nuances and beauty hidden in printed materials, the joy of revealing mysteries along with the author. Reading a book and watching a movie made out of it gives totally different experience. Writing a letter is totally different from writing an email. Our younger generation must not deny themselves the pleasures of reading. We are not trying to overlook the digital literature. The core literary skills it imparts cannot be ignored. But the question is will it convey the same benefits that a book would.

Today’s generation just doesn’t know enough on what is happening around. They gather news from the social media most of the times. Some Facebook status may say, “Train derails near Hosur”. There are so many who just read it and not bother to find more about the incident. This is just equivalent to reading the newspaper’s headline and leave it at that. The curiosity a newspaper heading generates pushes the reader to read the full story. A face book status often fails to do it and the reader’s lack of time and interest coupled with laziness to probe more leaves him deprived of so many details. Not many are in a position to talk at length or analyze even an issue of great concern. This is a dangerous tendency as we are raising a generation which would not be socially or politically sensitized. The editorial column of newspapers is actually a space, which comes up with a totally different perspective to many issues. The social media gives everyone space for himself that often one fails to look at the perspective of others in the rush to voice his/her opinion.

We have umpteen numbers of books which have beautifully explored various human relations and emotions. Language teachers often turn out to be confidants of students as students relate to the teachers in terms of these emotions. A language teacher can talk about love, hatred, parental relations and sibling rivalry while teaching the texts prescribed. The teacher has ultimate power to mould the young minds. The teacher should be able to use various texts for discussion, urge the young minds to read and contemplate so that they get to see layers of meaning in various things around them. The teachers should be in a position to talk to the students about the joy of reading a hand written letter years after it has been written. The long lost art of writing letters, reading books and beginning the day with a newspaper should be definitely revived.

5 Visual Media:

Visual pronounced as /vizhooel/ means relating to seeing or sight. The various types of visual media include digital and printed images, photography, graphic design, fashion, videos, architectural structures, fine arts, animation, typography, signs, advertising, posters, charts, billboards, television, cinema, computer, as well as gestures, body language and other forms of non-verbal communication.

As the old adage goes, ‘A picture speaks louder than a thousand words’. Similarly teachers of English should resort to visual media and use visual aids to teach the various subjects in English. One should remember that today most of the learners as well as speakers of English are those whose mother tongue is not English. As stated in the beginning of this paper, each one comes with his/her way of speaking English. A typical classroom in India will have students from different regions who speak English in their own regional style as well as students hailing from different types of schools and family background. There is always a quintessential group of students with Brit or American accent who will be from some international schools, another set of students from regional English medium schools whose English will have heavy mother tongue influence or MTI. Then there are those students who refuse to open their mouths and keep to themselves as they lack confidence about their English language skills and also because they are awed by those who speak fluent English. Inadvertently, these students would be from vernacular medium or Government run schools. And then you have a group of students who speak fluent English with a very neutral accent who will comprise a big chunk in the class. Under such circumstances the job of a teacher teaching any subject in English is tougher especially considering the fact that the teacher too can belong to any of these categories. In such a scenario, it becomes imperative on the part of the educators and the educational institutions to emphasize on the need to use visual media in teaching English effectively.

Visual aids help in making communication informative and persuasive. It helps the receiving audience (read students) understand the topic better, use of visual aids ranging from hand outs to power point presentations can offset the minor glitches English teachers face when teaching students who mostly hail from non- English speaking background. Any teacher would feel incomplete without using a chalkboard or a whiteboard, which is till date a very effective basic visual aid that comes handy where technology fails.

During a presentation on any topic, passing out handouts can complement the teaching process especially if it is for a prolonged period ranging from one hour and above. The only drawback is the temptation of the audience to read the matter printed on the hand out rather than listening to the presentation. Use of visual

6 media like diagrams, graphs, and pictures make learning subjects like Physics, Chemistry and Biology easier. Most of the terminologies used in science have root words belonging to Greek, Latin, French and other classical languages. Similarly Fashion Designing students use lines and sketches to understand their subject better and so does a student pursuing a course in the field of Computer Science. A power point presentation is a very popular visual medium that can enhance ‘English Language Teaching’. It is an ideal tool that can be used by all English teachers when teaching the subject as the students can see the relevant information being taught by the teacher in the class converted into visual forms like charts, graphs, pictures and videos. We should keep in mind that there are many students who can retain what is being taught only if they can visualize the matter either the teacher should take time out of her/his schedule to explain the chapter in a story telling way or s/he will have to use visual aids to help such students. Joel Jacob Samuel, a student of T. John College pursuing his degree in the combination course of English, Journalism and Psychology states, ‘I find it difficult to remember what is being taught in Optional English no matter how many times the teacher has explained. But subjects like Journalism where a lot of presentations are used is easier to recollect.’ Using of video clips as visual aids in teaching English too can be very effective. But the relevant clips have to be selected carefully and should be interspersed in between teaching sessions. Speaking to a cross section of language teachers we realized that many have still not warmed up to the use of technology in teaching hard core literary subjects. On the other side of the page, there are those teaching in Management courses and Soft Skills trainers who use power point presentations to the maximum. While technology can never substitute the charm of animated classroom teaching, nevertheless it has to be incorporated in a balanced way. Dr. Panchali Mukherjee, HOD, Department of Languages, T. John College, Bangalore, vouches for showing movies adapted from literary texts to students of English as she feels it helps the students to absorb the nuances of the lesson better and faster.

Cinema being an audio-visual medium it can be a very powerful learning tool. Every major work in literature has been adapted into movies in various languages. Thus, Shakespeare’s Othello has been made into a classic Hollywood movie as well as adapted into different settings like ‘Omkara’ a Bollywood adaptation of Othello, featuring Saif Ali Khan and Kareena Kapoor with Ajay Devgan playing the tragic hero. While the rustic setting of rural North India formed its setting, in the Malayalam movie Kaliyatam starring Suresh Gopi who plays Othello’s character and Manju Warrier plays Desdemona with a traditional ritual as the main setting for the same adaptation. Thus, the students will be able to relate to the lesson being taught better when juxtaposed against settings they are familiar with.

7 The role of audio clippings while teaching English to a group of Engineering and Management students cannot be overlooked. As already mentioned, today’s virtual job environment necessitates every professional of the IT, Finance and Management sectors to use neutral English and understand various variations of the language. Though we have students who watch Hollywood movies most of them don’t understand each and every word spoken. Many a time, we tend to take a closer look at the expression of the actor, try to correlate what happened in the previous scene and thus understand what is shown on the screen. This kind of permutation –combination method will not come to the aid of students in their work place as most of the times they don’t even get to see the person they are listening to. Moreover a wrong interpretation can cost them their job. This is where audio clips can be put to use. Training the students with the help of audio clips, which would expose them to various accents, is an absolute necessity in today’s scenario. Even the exams such as IELTS give a lot of importance to the candidate’s listening skills. English movies should be screened in the classroom at regular intervals as movies are excellent teachers and they talk a lot about culture and behavioral patterns of a few cross sections of the society as well. Thus, visual media has to be used effectively to complement English language teaching. Social Media: Its influence on the Language and the Gen Y:

We live in a virtual world where everything and everybody is just a click away. The role of social media in social networking, business development and maintaining of personal relations can never be demeaned. But the language becomes very polluted because of a lot of abbreviations and slangs. In a survey held among the students of T. John College, Bangalore and Amrita School of Engineering, Bangalore, 95% of the students said they use slangs and abbreviations because it made them feel stylish and “cool”. 85% of the faculty members who participated in the same survey said they do not understand most of the slangs and abbreviations and it made them feel outdated. The older generation is completely out of sync with Gen Y because of the over use of abbreviations and slangs which are Greek and Latin to them. Most people of the old generation don’t understand “ROFL, TTYL, BOGO”. The same is the situation with many words. Many words have lost their original meaning and the new meaning has nothing to do with the one which already existed. The best example in this category would be the word “screw”. To a person of the old generation, who is very proficient in the language will relate screw to a metal thing which is a type of fastener. But the Gen Y has given a totally vulgar meaning to “Screw”. One must understand that this semantic change cannot be taken in a lighter vein. While accepting the fact that semantic changes are inevitable we have to acknowledge that changes happen too abrupt these days and most of them are totally unwanted.

8 Social behavior itself gets disturbed because of the imprudent use of social media. The “like” button on the Facebook is clicked even for a status, which says, “Lost my mother to cardiac arrest”. Most of us don’t know how to put in words in our response to a joke as we are used to typing “LOL”. The icons have taken place of alphabets. The auto correction mode often takes care of the spelling and grammar that we don’t even realize we are making a spelling or grammar mistake. Words have lost their depth. Gone are the days when we used the word “awesome” or “fantastic” for things which are rare and exotic. Even the picture of a dog and a monkey in face book calls for comments that say awesome and fantastic. English is a language, which is an El Dorado of words, which can express the deepest of human emotions. But the current generation has abused the language to such an extent that words have lost their depth.

Teachers should definitely be in a position to talk to the students on how to behave on social forums like Facebook and Twitter. Encouraging the students to try to respond in grammatically correct and full sentences is a must. Though our students know that they cannot use the abbreviations and slangs in official circles, they fail to use and practice grammatically correct English. Social media could be a wonderful platform to express one’s feelings and perspectives. Everybody loves to have his/her own space to voice his or her feelings and that is exactly what social media provides us. The only criterion here is a good language and good grammar that would fetch us better readership.

Conclusion:

English has taken deep roots in India. It has achieved an Indian character and we Indians to an extent have become masters of the language. Gone are the days when Indian BPO companies fooled callers from UK and US by making them believe that they are talking to Americans or British executives. The world knows about out sourcing today so there is absolutely no need to fake the accent or imitate the native speaker. All we need is a neutral accent, decent grammar and a rich vocabulary. The wise use of the classroom and the print, audio visual and social media can definitely enhance the teaching and learning experience. All said and done, no language can be learnt overnight. It requires a lot of perseverance, hard work and above all tireless practice. “Talk, talk and talk, talk without the fear of going wrong “is the mantra of learning any language. Teachers should be able to boost the confidence of his/her students and help them shed the fear and shame of going wrong while speaking in English. Most of our students go abroad to pursue their Masters and it is our responsibility to make sure that they don’t feel out of place while being there. Table manners and etiquettes, self-grooming, body language also should be included in the

9 curriculum of under graduate students as these are equally important as the language. Anything from a regular brochure to a classic movie could be used as a medium of instruction. What medium is to be chosen – that is completely dependent on the teacher’s discretion. The choice might depend on the kind of students, the environment and applicability to the module taught. At the end of the day along with teaching the language the teacher should be able to mould the students into a confident, free thinking, positive, ‘ready to face the world’s youngsters. Above all the teacher should be able to create the love for language that is being taught. As Horace Mann says, “A teacher who is attempting to teach, without inspiring the pupil with a desire to learn, is hammering on a cold iron."

References: 1. Thorpe, Showick. Importance of English language in highereducation.

2. Retrieved from indiaeducation.review.com

3. Yaqub, Saima. The influence of the media on language. english language learning forum, blogspot.in. March 16, 2009 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ Visual_communication

4. Smith, John. "Hot Lunch Options." Survey. 6 June 2012.

5. Narayanan, Deepa. “Influence of print and social media”, Survey. 13 Feb 2015.

6. Sunath, Bovina. “Role of visual media in teaching English”. Survey 14 Feb 2015.

10 Influence of Various Polymers on Floating Matrix Tablets of Valsartan Dr. Ganesh N.S.1, Dr. Panner Selvam R2 & Nithiya M. Thomas3

Abstract

The objective of the present study is to optimize, formulate and evaluate the floating matrix tablets of Valsartan, an antihypertensive drug. It has low oral bioavailability (25%) and half- life of 6hrs, but it has a high absorption in the upper gastrointestinal tract (GIT). Floating Drug Delivery System (FDDS) is a suitable drug delivery system to prolong the retentive time of a dosage form in the stomach thereby improving the oral bioavailability of the drug. FDDS promises to be a potential approach for gastric retention. In this study, the FDDS employed sodium bicarbonate as a gas generating agent, citric acid as an effervescent producing agent and HPMC, HEC and HPC as polymers. Sodium bicarbonate in the acidic environment reacts with the acid and produces carbon dioxide gas. The evolved gas will get entrapped in the matrix leading to floating of the tablet. The combination of HPMC and HEC showed better in vitro drug release.

Keywords: Floating drug delivery system, In-vitro buoyancy Valsartan, HPMC, HPC, HEC.

1. Professor, Department of Pharmaceutics, T. John College of Pharmacy. 2. Associate Professor, Department of Pharmaceutics, T. John College of Pharmacy. 3. Department of Pharmaceutics, T. John College of Pharmacy.

11 Introduction

The therapeutic effectiveness of a drug depends upon the ability of the dosage form to deliver the medicament to its site of action at a rate and amount sufficient to elicit the desired pharmacological response (Brahmankar). Drugs that are sparingly soluble or insoluble drugs or having low solubility at intestinal pH and having shorter half-lives will not be present in sufficient concentration in plasma to elicit the desired therapeutic effect. Hence bioavailability is reduced. Prolonged gastric retention improves bioavailability reduces drug waste and improves solubility for drugs that are less soluble in a high pH environment. It has applications also for local drug delivery to the stomach and proximal small intestines.

Several approaches are currently used to prolong gastric retention time. These include floating drug delivery systems, swelling systems, expanding systems, high density systems and other delayed gastric emptying devices. Floating drug delivery system (FDDS) is one of the important approaches to achieve gastric retention to obtain sufficient drug bioavailability. This have a bulk density less than gastric fluids and so remain buoyant in the stomach without affecting gastric emptying rate for a prolonged period and the drug is released at a desired rate for the system (Vishal).

Based on the mechanism of buoyancy there are two distantly different technologies, that are, non-effervescent and effervescent systems, which have been utilized in the development of floating drug delivery systems. Non effervescent FDDS are usually prepared from gel forming or highly swellable cellulose type hydrocolloids, polysaccharides or matrix forming polymers like polyacrylate, polycarbonate, polystyrene and polymethacrylate. The drug is mixed with polymers which swells on contact with the gastric fluid after oral administration and maintains relative integrity of shape and bulk density of less than unity within and outer gelatinious barrier. The air trapped by the swollen polymer confers buoyancy to these dosage forms. Effervescent FDDS employ matrices from swelling polymers like Methocel or chitosan and effervescent components such as sodium bicarbonate and tartaric acid/citric acid or matrices having chambers of liquid components that gasify at body temperature. The matrices are fabricated such that in the stomach, carbon dioxide is liberated by the acidity of the gastric contents and is entrapped in the gellified hydrocolloid (Roop).

Hypertension is the term used to describe high blood pressure. Persistent hypertension risk factors are stroke, heart attack, heart failure, arterial aneurysm etc. Hypertension is caused by inability of the kidneys to excrete sodium, an

12 overactive rennin-angiotensin system, an overactive sympathetic nervous system. The management involves proper planning and control of blood pressure levels. Alpha blockers, Calcium channel blockers, Angiotensin- converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors, Beta blockers etcetera are used for satisfactory management of Hypertension (Willbert). Valsartan is an angiotensin II receptor antagonist (more commonly called an "ARB", or angiotensin receptor blocker) with particularly high affinity for the type I (AT1) angiotensin receptor. By blocking the action of angiotensin, Valsartan dilates blood vessels and reduces blood pressure. The half life of the drug is 6 hrs and the bioavailability is 25 % (Wikipedia).

Materials and Methods: Materials

Valsartan (Sandoz Pvt. Ltd., Navi Mumbai), HPMC (Loba Chemie Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai), HPC (HI Media Laboratories Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai), HEC (Loba Chemie Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai), Sodium bicarbonate (Karnataka Fine Chem., Bangalore), Citric acid (Karnataka Fine Chem., Bangalore), Magnesium stearate (Loba Chemie Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai), Talc (Nice chemicals Pvt. Ltd., Kerala), MCC (Merck Ltd., Bangalore), Methanol (Nice Chemicals Pvt. Ltd., Kerala), Hydrochloric acid (Fisher Scientific Ltd., Mumbai), Potassium bromide (IR grade) ( S. D. Fine Chem. Ltd., Mumbai). Methods (Sonia)

Tablets containing 40mg Valsartan were prepared by direct compression with different proportions of release-retarding polymer (HPMC, HPC and HEC) and a gas-forming agent (sodium bicarbonate). After passing through sieve no. 20 separately, powders were mixed using a pestle and mortar for 10 min. microcrystalline cellulose and lubricant were then added to the above mixed powders, mixing was continued for another 3 minutes. The tablets were punched using single punch tablet machine equipped with flat-faced punches. The composition of different formulations of Valsartan floating tablets is shown in Table 1.

13 Table 1: Formulation Chart of Different Valsartan Tablets

Ingredients(mg) F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Valsartan 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 40 HPMC 10 20 30 HPC 10 20 30 HEC 10 20 30 Sodium Bicar- 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 bonate Citric Acid 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Magnesium 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Stearate Talc 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 MCC 115 125 135 115 125 135 115 125 135 115 115 115 Total weight 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200

Pre-Compression Parameters:

Bulk density: Bulk density was determined by taking a known weight of dried granules in measuring cylinder. The bulk volume is noted and the bulk density was calculated from the following equation:g

Weight of granules Bulk Density = Bulk volume Tapped density: It is the ratio of powder to the volume occupied by the same mass of the powder after a standard tapping a measure i.e. tapped volume

Weight of granules Tapped Density = Tapped volume

Hausner’s ratio: Hausner’s ratio is used for the predicting powder flow characteristics Tapped Density Hausner's ratio = Bulk Density

14 Compressibility index: Compressibility index of the granules was determined by using bulk density and tapped density of granules Tapped Density — Bulk Density Compressibility index = x 100 Tapped Density

Angle of repose: The powders-mix was tested by the fixed funnel method. The accurately weighed powders were taken in a funnel with orifice 8 mm in diameter. The powders were allowed to flow through the funnel orifice freely on a powder paper to form a cone like heap. The diameter (base) and height of the powder cone were measured with the help of a ruler and the angle of repose was calculated using the following equation:

θ = tan-1(h/r)

Where θ = angle of repose, h = height of pile, r = radius of the base of the pile. Post-Compression Parameters:

Hardness: The Monsanto hardness tester was used to determine the tablet hardness. The tablet was held between a fixed and moving jaw. Scale was adjusted to zero; load was gradually increased until the tablet fractured. The value of the load at that point gives a measure of hardness of the tablet. Hardness was expressed in kg/cm2.

Friability: Pre-weighed tablets (W1) were rotated at 25 rpm for 4 minutes in the chamber of friability testing apparatus. Then the tablets were de-dusted well with the help of a blower and re-weighed the same tablets (W2) to determine their loss in weight. Percent Friability (F %) was thus calculated according to the following formula W1 ­­— W2 % Friability = x 100 W1 Weight Variation: Twenty tablets were accurately weighed individually in mil- ligrams (mg) using an analytical balance. Average weight is calculated and comparing the individual weights to the average. The tablet meets the USP test if not more than 2 tablets are outside the % limits and if no tablets differ by more than 2 times the % limits. Thickness: The thickness of the tablets was measured by digital vernier caliper. It is expressed in mm.

15 Drug Content: Three tablets from each formulation were weighed individually and powdered. The quantity of powder was equivalent to 40 mg. The equivalent weight Valsartan was transferred into 100 ml volumetric flask diluted to 100ml with sufficient amount of 0.1N HCl. Then aliquot of the filtrate was diluted suitably and analyzed spectrophotometrically at 250 nm against blank.

Floating Lag Time:

The tablets were placed in a 100 ml beaker containing 0.1N HCl solution. The time required for the tablet to rise to the surface and float was determined as floating lag time and duration of time for which the tablet constantly remains on the surface of medium was recorded as total floating time.

In-vitro Dissolution Studies:

Dissolution studies were carried out employing USP dissolution type-II apparatus and 900ml of pH 1.2 buffer (0.1N HCl) as the dissolution medium for 12 hours. The medium was allowed to equilibrate to temperature of 37°C ±0.5°C. The tablet was placed in the vessel and the vessel was covered. The apparatus was operated for12hrs at 100 rpm. At definite time intervals 5 ml of the aliquot of sample was withdrawn and filtered (0.45μm). The volume replaced with equivalent amount of the fresh dissolution medium. The samples were analyzed spectrophotometrically at 250nm using UV-spectrophotometer. Results are average of three replicate experiments

Drug-Polymer Compatibility FTIR Spectrophotometer

The compatibility of drug and polymer was analyzed using FTIR spectrophotometer. In this technique, 1mg of the sample and 100mg of potassium bromide (KBr) (1:100 ratio) was finely ground using mortar and pestle. A small amount of mixture was placed for 2 minutes under a hydraulic press compressed at 7 Kg/ cm2 to form a transparent pellet. The pellet was kept in the sample holder and scanned from 4000 cm-1 to 400 cm-1 in Shimadzu FT-IR spectrophotometer. Samples were prepared for drug (Valsartan), polymer (HPMC, HPC, HEC) and a physical mixture of drug and polymers. The spectra obtained were compared and interpreted for the functional group peaks.

16 Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC)

DSC study has been done to understand crystalline and amorphous behaviour of pure drug and drug in the formulation. The disappearance or shifting of endo- or exothermic peaks of drug is indication of change in crystalline structure of drug in the formulation (Rajendra Awasthi). In the present study, DSC analyses of the samples were carried out by using Mettler Toledo DSC 822e. Samples were heated at a heating rate of 100C/min over the temperature range of 30.0-220.00C. X-ray Diffraction (XRD)

XRD method is one of the most useful tools for qualitative characterization of crystalline compounds both in the formulation and in the pure form of drug (Kuldeep). XRD patterns were recorded using Bruker AXS D8 Advance. XRD patterns were traced for Valsartan.

Results and Discussion Pre-Compression Evaluations

The bulk and tapped density of prepared granules were found to be in the range of 0.31 - 0.33g/cc, 0.35 - 0.38g/cc respectively. Carr’s Index and Hausner’s Ratio were found to be in the range of 10.57- 18.42%, 1.06 - 1.22 for all formulations, which indicates that the prepared granules of all formulations have fair to good flow property. The angle of repose of the granules was in the range of 30.5-33.8º which indicates that the granules of all formulations are freely flowable (Table 2). Table 2: Pre Compression Parameters

Formulation Bulk Density Tapped Carrs Index Hausner’s Angle of (g/cc) Density (%) Ratio Repose (g/cc) ◦ F1 0.32 ± 0.042 0.38 ± 0.039 15.78 ± 0.16 1.18 ± 0.13 32.21 ± 0.18 F2 0.33 ± 0.033 0.35 ± .032 15.02 ± 0.15 1.06 ± 0.14 31.12 ± 0.28 F3 0.31 ± 0.031 0.37 ± 0.028 16.21 ± 0.16 1.19 ± 0.11 32.32 ± 0.31 F4 0.31 ± 0.035 0.38 ± 0.036 18.42 ± 0.17 1.22 ± 0.12 33.14 ± 0.32 F5 0.34 ± 0.032 0.36 ± 0.029 17.45 ± 0.18 1.2 ± 0.15 30.5 ± 0.26

17 F6 0.31 ± 0.034 0.31 ± 0.034 15.78 ± 0.11 1.19 ± 0.13 31.01 ± 0.16 F7 0.32 ± 0.41 0.35 ± 0.024 10.57 ± 0.14 1.09 ± 0.14 30.7 ± 0.28 F8 0.33 ± 0.032 0.35 ± 0.027 18.42 ± 0.18 1.09 ± 0.12 32.21 ± 0.19 F9 0.32 ± 0.045 0.36 ± 0.022 11.11 ± 0.19 1.12 ± 0.18 33.13 ± 0.18 F10 0.31 ± 0.051 0.35 ± 0.033 11.42 ± 0.21 1.12 ± 0.14 33.31±0.14 F11 0.33 ± 0.051 0.38 ± 0.038 13.15 ± 0.15 1.15 ± 0.15 33.8 ± 0.12 F12 0.31 ± 0.061 0.35 ± 0.42 11.24 ± 0.23 1.12 ± 0.19 33.3 ± 0.17

± Standard deviation (n=3)

Post - Compression Evaluations

The results of the physical properties of the tablets are shown in the table 3. The hardness of the tablets was found to be in the range of 4.13 - 4.54 kg/cm2. The friability of all the prepared tablets was found to be in the range of 0.1 - 0.4 %. Weight variation test results were found to be within the prescribed official limits. The drug content for all the formulations were found to be in the range of 98.24 - 99.88% (Table 3). The floating lag time and floating time was found to be 22 – 33 secs and 6 - >12 hrs. The results are given in the table 4. Table 3: Post-Compression Parameters

Hardness Thickness Weight Friability Drug Content Formulation (Kg/cm2) (mm) variation (%) (%) (%) F1 4.13 ± 0.11 2.73 ± 0.08 198.8 ± 0.8 0.2 ± 0.43 99.08 ± 0.36 F2 4.24 ± 0.13 2.67 ± 0.08 199.6 ± 0.9 0.3 ± 0.026 98.97 ± 0.18 F3 4.24 ± 0.05 2.65 ± 0.06 199.3 ± 0.8 0.1 ± 0.34 99.38 ± 0.16 F5 4.26 ± 0.1 2.67 ± 0.06 200 ± 1 0.2 ± 0.58 99.18 ± 0.11 F6 4.45 ± 0.09 2.75 ± 0.05 199.3 ± 0.8 0.3 ± 0.43 99.51 ± 0.14 F7 4.25 ± 0.14 2.61 ± 0.07 199.7 ± 1.1 0.1 ± 0.51 99.54 ± 0.16 F8 4.25 ± 0.135 2.61 ± 0.071 199.7 ± 1.1 0.1 ± 0.51 98.78 ± 0.12 F9 4.48 ± 0.044 2.62 ± 0.081 200.2 ± 1.1 0.4 ± 0.36 99.25 ± 0.27 F10 4.52 ± 0.042 2.71 ± 0.084 199.2 ± 0.9 0.3 ± 0.43 98.20 ± 0.22 F11 4.24 ± 0.082 2.72 ± 0.082 200.8 ± 0.44 0.3 ± 0.21 99.88 ± 0.12 F12 4.54 ± 0.089 2.64 ± 0.054 199.6 ± 1.14 0.1 ± 0.42 98.24 ± 0.02

± Standard Deviation (n=3)

18 Table 4: In-vitro Buoyancy Time

Formulation Floating lagtime (sec) Floating time (hrs) F1 25 >12 F2 25 >12 F3 30 >12 F4 24 6 F5 31 6 F6 33 6 F7 28 >12 F8 30 >12 F9 26 >12 F10 27 9 F11 30 12 F12 31 10

In-vitro Release Study In-vitro release studies were carried out using USP- 2 (paddle method) apparatus in 0.1N HCl. The results are depicted in the figure 1. The formulations F1-F12 show 97.14, 97.18, 98.21, 96.52, 97.23, 98.31, 97.57, 97.95, 98.75, 97.94, 99.22, 97.99 % release respectively over a period of 12hrs. The formulation F11 showed drug release 99.22%. F4, F5, F6 formulation release at 6hrs.

Figure 1: Dissolution profile of formulation of Valsartan floating matrix tablets

19 Kinetics: Different models like zero order, first order, Higuchi’s Model, and Korsmeyer Peppa’s Plots were drawn. Analysis of release data according to different kinetic models is shown in the table no 5.17. The regression coefficient (R²) values for Zero order, First order, Higuchi’s, Korsmeyer-Peppas Plots for formulation F1 to F12 were studied. This confirms that non-fickian and class II transport diffusion was the main mechanism. The regression coefficient value of formulations Zero Order is thus the drug release follows Zero Order Kinetics (Figure 2-5).

Figure 2: Data of Release Kinetics (Zero Order)

Figure 3: Data of Release Kinetics (First Order)

20 Figure 4: Data of Kinetic Model (Higuchi)

Figure 5: Data of Kinetic Model (Korsmeyer Peppes Plot)

21 Compatibility Studies

FTIR Studies

The characteristic peaks of Valsartan were unchanged and prominently observed in IR spectra of formulation suggesting that there was no interaction between drug and excipients

(Figure 6).

Figure 6: IR spectra of Valsartan + HPMC + HPC + HEC Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC)

The DSC thermograms of pure drug and formulation are presented in Figure 7 and Figure 8. The endothermic peak in both the cases shows no significant change.

22 Figure 7: DSC Thermogram of Pure Drug

Figure 8: DSC Thermogram of Formulation (F11)

X-ray Diffraction (XRD)

X-ray diffractogram showed multiple peaks for Valsartan indicating crystalline nature of drug. (Figure 9)

23

Figure 9: XRD pattern for Pure Drug and Formulation (F11)

Conclusion

The present study reported the development of Valsartan floating matrix tablets with polymers HPMC, HPC and HEC. Sodium bicarbonate in the acidic environment reacts with the acid and produces carbon dioxide. The evolved gas got entrapped in the matrix leading to floating of the tablet. On the basis of IR study, DSC, XRD, in vitro release studies and its kinetics, F11 was selected as the most ideal formulation. Drug release kinetics showed that the formulations exhibited diffusion characteristics and highly correlated with Higuchi spherical matrix release, followed by zero order kinetics.

References 1. Brahmanker D.M., & Sunil B.Jaiswal. Biopharmaceutical and pharmacokinetics IInd edition Pg. No-315. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Valsartan.

2. Kuldeep Patel, Prince Kumar Jain, Raviraj Baghel, Preeti Tagde, & Ajay Patil. Preparation and in vitro evaluation of a microballoon delivery system for Domperidone. Der Pharmacia Lettre. 2011; 3(6):131-141.

3. Rejendra Awasthi, & Giriraj T. Kulkarni. Development and characterization of Amoxicillin loaded floating microballoons for the treatment of Helicobactor pylori induced gastric ulcer. Asian Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences. 2013; 8:174-180.

24 4. Roop K. Khar, S.P Vyas, Farhan J. Ahamad, & Gaurav K. Jain. Theory and practice of industrial pharmacy fourth edition Pg. No-622.

5. Sonia Dhiman, & Thakur Gurjeet Singh. Design and optimization of floating matrix tablets of Famotidine by central composite design. Asian Journal of Pharmaceutical and Clinical Research. Vol.5, suppl.1, 2012.

6. Vishal Bhardwaj. FDDS: A Review Pharmacophore. 2013; 4(1): 26-38.

7. Wilbert S. Aronow. Antihypertensive action of dietary flaxseed in hypertensive patients. Hypertension 2014: 78(7): 1062-1066.

25 A Study to Evaluate the Effectiveness of Structured Teaching Programme on Knowledge and Attitude Regarding Junk Food and Their Hazards Among the P.U. Students Praveen T. P.1

Abstract New research shows that high level phosphate present in junk food accelerates signs of aging and also increases the prevalence and severity of complications such as chronic kidney disease, cardiovascular calcifications, and can also induce severe muscle and skin atrophy. This study was conducted to evaluate the effectiveness of Structured Teaching Programme on knowledge and attitude regarding junk food and its hazards among PU students in Hassan, Karnataka. Pre-test and post-test conducted for both the Experimental Group (N=40) and the Control group (N=30). Structured Teaching Programme in the form of power point presentation done for experimental group. Data collected and analyzed using descriptive and inferential statistics. The result shows that the knowledge score is having association with socio demographic variables like place of residence and accompanying member. There is an association with post test level of attitude with demographic variables like monthly pocket money, type of family and dietary patterns. The study concludes for the future health of children we should improve their knowledge by conducting periodic teaching programme on common junk food and their hazards. This study suggests that a school health nurse should be appointed in all the schools so that they can educate the students properly.

Keywords: Junk Food, Structured Teaching Programme, Experimental Group, Control Group.

1. Assistant Professor in Community Health Nursing, T. John College of Nursing.

26 Introduction Habits start young and it is up to the environment (home and school primarily) to cultivate healthy habits in children, the school being the next-best ‘home of learning and nurturing’. With the rise in the incidence of obesity and overweight amongst youngsters and adults; the dark -side of ‘junk-food’ cannot be overlooked. The statistics of America records sixty million deaths every year due to obesity or overweight, which quietly and surely boils down to poor lifestyle and eating habits.1

The statistics of American records sixty million deaths every year due to obesity or overweight which quietly and surely boils down to poor lifestyle and eating habits. Indians now find themselves amongst the top 10 most frequent consumers of fast food across the globe. .2

The proportion of foods that children consumed from restaurants and fast food outlets increased by nearly 300% between 1997 and 2006. Children’s soft drink consumption has also increased during those years, and now soft drinks provide soft drink consumers 188 kcal/d beyond the energy intake of non-consumers. Furthermore, overweight and obesity in childhood may predispose persons to morbidity in adulthood.3

So students and other youth should inform about the health hazards of junk foods and assess their knowledge regarding junk foods and make a positive attitude towards the hazards of junk foods. By improving their knowledge we can build a strong, disease free new generation.

Title of the Study

“A Study to Evaluate the Effectiveness of Structured Teaching Programme on Knowledge and Attitude Regarding Junk Foods and Its Hazards Among the P. U. Students of Selected Colleges at Rural and Urban Areas at Hassan, Karnataka.”

Objectives of the Study 1. To assess the knowledge of PU students of selected colleges at rural and urban areas in Hassan regarding junk food and their hazards before the administration of ‘Structured Teaching Programme’ both in experimental and control group.(Rural- control group Urban- experimental group)

27 2. To assess the attitude of PU students of selected colleges at rural and urban areas in Hassan regarding junk food and their hazards before the administration of Structured Teaching Programme both in the experimental and the control groups. 3. To assess the knowledge of PU students of selected colleges at the rural and urban areas at Hassan regarding junk foods and its hazards after the administration of Structured Teaching Programme. 4. To assess the attitude of PU students of selected colleges at the rural and urban areas in Hassan regarding junk food and their hazards after the administration of Structured Teaching Programme, 5. To evaluate the effectiveness of Structured Teaching Programme regarding junk food and their hazards among the PU students of selected colleges at the rural and urban areas in Hassan. 6. To associate the post-test knowledge score of PU students of selected colleges at the rural and urban areas with selected socio – demographic data. 7. To associate the ‘Post Test Attitude’ score of PU students of selected colleges at rural and urban areas with selected socio – demographic data.

Research Hypothesis H1: There will be a significant difference between pretest and post test knowledge scores of PU students regarding junk food and their hazards both in the experimental and the control groups. H2: There will be a significant difference between pre-test and post-test attitude scores of PU students regarding junk food and their hazards both in an experimental and a control group. H3: There will be significant association between selected socio demographic variables and posttest knowledge scores of PU students regarding junk food and their hazards.

Research Approach

The research approach adopted for this study was an evaluative approach. Evaluative approach helps to explain the effect of an independent variable on a dependent variable.

Research Design The research design is a quasi-experimental, non-equivalent control group design or four celled design without randomization.

28 Variables Independent Variable

An independent variable is the variable that stands alive and it is not dependent on any other variables.

Structured Teaching Program regarding knowledge of junk food and their hazards is the independent variable in this study. Dependent Variable

The dependent variable is the variable that the researcher is interested in understanding, explaining or predicting.

Knowledge and attitude score of PU students on junk foods and its hazards is the dependent variable in this study. Extraneous Variable

Extraneous variables are those variables that are present in research environment which may interfere with the research findings by acting as unwanted independent variables.

In the present study it refers to selected demographic variables such as gender, residence, monthly family income, monthly pocket money, how often you eat junk foods, usually you prefer to have junk foods, Type of family, food habits. Target Population

Target population is defined as the “entire aggregation of cases that meets a designed set of criteria”. Populations are not restricted to human subjects. The target population in the present study includes all the PU students of all the colleges at Hassan. Accessible Population

Accessible population of the present study includes PU students of Sujala PU College, Hassan and Govt. PU College, Shantigrama. Sample and Sample Size

A sample consists of a sub-set of a population selected to participate in a research study.

29 The sample used for this study was 70 PU students of selected PU colleges at the rural and the urban areas at Hassan and those who fulfill the inclusion criteria. Sampling Technique

Sampling refers to the process of selecting a portion of the population to represent the entire population.

The sampling technique used in this study is non-randomized convenient sampling. Description of the Tool

The tool developed for the study was a structured knowledge questionnaire to assess the knowledge of PU students on junk foods and its hazards. The main purpose of developing this tool was to educate the PU students regarding the hazards of junk food.

The tool consists of a structured questionnaire and STP junk food and their hazards. It has 4 sections.

Section I: Socio-demographic variables.

Section II: A knowledge questionnaire on junk food and their hazards.

Section III: Attitude scale.

Section IV: Structured Teaching Programme on junk food and their hazards.

Data Analysis TABLE 1: Distribution of the Subjects According to Socio- Demographic Variables N=70 Experimental Group Control Group N=30 N=40 Rural Demographic Variables Urban

Number Percentage Number Percentage

30 Male 10 33.3 16 40 Gender Female 20 66.7 24 60 Place of Urban 0 0 10 25 residence Rural 30 100 30 75 Rs up to 5000 18 60 4 10 Monthly Rs 5000-10000 4 13.3 4 10 Family Income Rs 10000-20000 6 20 30 75 Above Rs 20000 2 6.7 2 5

Monthly below Rs 500 26 86.7 10 25 Pocket Rs 500-1000 2 6.7 28 70 Money Rs 1000-2000 2 6.7 2 5

TABLE 2: Distribution of the Subjects According to Socio- Demographic Variables N=70 Control Group Experimental N=30 Group N=40 Demographic Variables Control Number Percentage Percentage Group Daily 4 13.3 5 12.5 More than two Frequency of times in a week 6 20 8 20 Eating Junk Food Weekly twice 2 6.7 4 10 Weekly once 18 60 23 57.5 Accompanying Friends 23 76.7 31 77.5 Members for Family members 7 23.3 9 22.5 Junk Food Nuclear 17 56.7 30 75 Type of Family Joint 13 43.3 10 25 Vegetarian 9 30 11 27.5 Dietary Pattern Mixed 21 70 29 72.5

31 Interpretation Table 1and 2 reveals the socio-demographic information of PU students who participated in the study. The result shows that 33.33of students were males and 66.7 % were females in the control group and 40% of the students were males and 60 % were females in the experimental group, 75% were residing in the rural area and 25% were residing in the urban area and all the students of the control group were residing in the rural area. In the control group 86.70% are getting a pocket money below 500, 6.7% are getting a pocket money between 500-1000, 6.7% with a pocket money of 1000-2000 and in the experimental group 25% getting a pocket money below 500, 70% with a pocket money between 500-1000 and 5% with a pocket money of 1000-2000. A control group of 13.3% students eat junk food daily, 20% eat junk food more than two times in a week, about 6.7% eat weekly twice and 60% eat junk food weekly once. In an experimental group, 12.5% students eat junk food daily. 20% eats junk food more than two times in a week. About 10% eat weekly twice and 57.5% eat junk food weekly once. In the control group, 76.7% will have junk food with friends and 23.3% will be having junk food with their family members. 77.5% will have junk food with friends and 22.5% will be having junk food with family members in an experimental group. 56.7% are living in a nuclear family and 43.3% are living in a joint family in the control group. In the experimental group 75% are living in a nuclear family and 25% are living in a joint family. In the control group, 30% are vegetarians and 70% are mixed, in an experimental group 27.5% are vegetarians and 72.5% have a mixed type of dietary pattern. TABLE 3: Comparison of Enhancement of Knowledge Scores on Junk Food and their Hazards between the Experimental and the Control Groups Control Group Control Experimental DIFFERENCE t-test for vs Experimen- Group N=30 Group N=40 Independent tal Group Groups (Enhancement) Mean SD Mean SD Mean SE Over all 0.3 1.725 12.52 1.921 12.225 0.444 t=27.506

N=70 df = 68, p = 0.05, HS

32 Interpretation Table 3 reveals the comparison of overall enhancement of knowledge of PU students both in the experimental and the control groups. In the control group the mean enhancement is 0.3 and the mean enhancement in the experimental group is 12.52. The mean enhancement is 12.225 with a standard error of 0.444. The student’s paired t- test value is t= 27.506

Hypothesis Testing H1: There will be a significant difference between pre-test and post-test knowledge scores of PU students regarding junk food and their hazard both in the experimental and the control groups.

Table 3 reveals the enhancement of knowledge of PU students both in the experimental and the control group. In the control group, the mean enhancement is only 0.3 and the mean enhancement in the experimental group is 12.52. The mean enhancement is 12.225 with a standard error of 0.444. The student’s paired t- test value is t = 27.506. So H1 is accepted.

33 TABLE 4: Comparison of Enhancement of Attitude Scores on Junk Food and their Hazards between the Experimental and the Control Group N=70 Control Control Experimental DIFFERENCE Group vs Group N=30 Group N=40 t-test for In- Experimental dependent Group Groups (Enhance- Mean SD Mean SD Mean SE ment) Over all 0.43 4.256 10.7 4.653 10.267 1.084 t=9.471 df = 68, p = 0.000, HS

Interpretation

Table 4 reveals the comparison of overall enhancement of attitude score of PU students both in the experimental and the control group. In the control group, the mean enhancement is 0.43 and the mean enhancement in the experimental group is 10.7. The mean difference is 10.267 with a standard error of 1.084. The student’s paired t- test value is t = 9.471

34 Hypothesis Testing

H2: There will be a significant difference between pre test and post test attitude scores of PU students regarding junk food and their hazards both in the experimental and the control group.

Table 4 reveals the comparison of overall enhancement of attitude score of PU students both in the experimental and the control group. In the control group, the mean enhancement is only 0.43 whereas the mean enhancement in the experimental group is 10.7. The mean difference is 10.267 with a standard error of 1.084. The student’s paired t- test value is t = 9.471. So there is a significant difference between pre-test and post-test attitude score. Hence H2 is accepted. TABLE 5: Association Between Post Test Level of Knowledge and Their Demographic Variables (Experimental Group) N=40 Level of Knowledge Chi Square Test Moderately Demographic Variables Adequate Adequate Gender Male 9 7 Chi Square 56.2% 43.8% Value=0.156 Female 15 9 P=0.693 62.5% 37.5% NS Place of Urban 2 7 Chi Square Residence 22.22% 78.78% Value=5.024 P=0.024 Rural 22 9 S 70.97% 29.03% Monthly Rs up to 5000 2 2 Chi Square Family Value=2.847 Income 50.0% 50.0% P=0.816 Rs 5000-10000 1 3 NS 25.0% 75.0% Rs 10000-20000 20 10 66.7% 33.3% Above Rs 20000 1 1 50.0% 50.0%

35 Monthly below Rs 500 7 3 Chi Square Pocket Value=0.595 Money 70.0% 30.0% P=0.743 Rs 500-1000 16 12 NS 57.1% 42.9% Rs 1000-2000 1 1 50.0% 50.0%

Table 6: Association Between Post Test Level of Knowledge and Their Demographic Variables (Experimental Group) {continue} N=40 Level of Knowledge Chi Square Moderately Test Demographic Variables Adequate Adequate Frequency of daily 3 2 Chi Square Eating Junk 60.0% 40.0% value=3.031 Food More than 4 3 P=0.387 two times in NS a week 57.1% 42.9% Weekly 4 0 twice 100.0% .0% Weekly 13 11 once 54.2% 45.8% Accompanying Friends 16 16 Chi Square Members for Value=4.746 Junk Food 50% 50% P=0.02 Family 8 0 S Members 100% 0% Type of family Nuclear 20 11 Chi Square Value=0.484 64.5% 35.5% P=0.487 Joint 4 5 NS 44.4% 55.6%

36 Dietary Pattern Vegetarian 6 5 Chi Square Value=0.188 54.5% 45.5% P=0.665 Mixed 18 11 NS 62.1% 37.9% Table 7: Association between post test Level of Attitude and their Demographic Variables (experimental group) N=40 Level of attitude Chi Square Test Moderately Demographic variables Adequate adequate Gender Male 6 10 Chi Square 37.5% 62.5% value=0.304 P=0.581 Female 7 17 NS 29.2% 70.8% Place of resi- Urban 3 6 Chi Square dence 33.3% 66.7% Value=0 P=1.00 Rural 10 21 NS 32.3% 67.7% Monthly Fam- Rs. up to 5000 2 2 Chi Square ily Income 50.0% 50.0% Value=3.685 Rs 5000-10000 0 4 P=0.298 NS .0% 100.0% Rs. 10000- 11 19 20000 36.7% 63.3% Above Rs. 0 2 20000 .0% 100.0% Monthly Below Rs. 500 7 3 Chi Square Pocket Money 70% 30% Value=8.938 P=0.011 Rs. 500-1000 6 22 S 21.42% 78.58% Rs 1000-2000 0 2 0% 100%

37 Table 8: Association Between Post Test Level of Attitude and their Demographic Variables (Experimental Group) {continue} N=40 Level of attitude Chi Square Test Moderately Adequate Demographic Variables Adequate Frequency of Eat- Daily 1 4 Chi Square ing Junk Food 20.0% 80.0% Value=0.781 P=0.854 More than 2 5 two times in a NS week 28.6% 71.4% 1 3 Weekly twice 25.0% 75.0% 9 15 Weekly once 37.5% 62.5% Accompanying 9 23 Chi Square Friends Members for 28.1% 71.9% Value=1.396 Junk Food Family mem- 4 4 P=0.237 bers 50.0% 50.0% NS Type of Family 7 26 Chi Square Nuclear 21.21% 78.79% Value=8.21 6 1 P=0.004 Joint 85.7% 14.3% S Dietary Pattern 0 9 Chi Square Vegetarian 0% 100% Value=5.405 13 16 P=0.02 Mixed 44.83% 55.17% S

Interpretation

Tables 5 and 6 reveal that there is an association between selected socio demographic variables and the post test level of knowledge regarding junk food and its hazards. Demographic variables like place of residence (Chi-square =5.024, P= 0.024), and influence of accompanying member (Chi-square =4.74, P= 0.02) are significantly associated with their post test scores.

38 Tables 7 and 8 reveal that there is an association between selected socio- demographic variables and the post-test level of attitude. Demographic variables like monthly pocket money (Chi-square =8.938 P= 0.011), Type of Family (Chi-square =8.21, P= 0.004) and dietary pattern (Chi-square=5.405, P=0.02) are significantly associated with their post-test attitude scores. These types of associations are statistically significant and they were calculated using Pearson Chi Square Test.

Hypothesis Testing H3: There will be a significant association between selected socio- demographic variables and post-test knowledge scores of PU students regarding junk food and its hazards.

Tables 5 and 6 reveal that there is a significant association between the post- test knowledge score with place of residence and influence of accompanying member. Tables 7 and 8 reveal the association between socio-demographic variables and the post-test level of attitude. Post-test attitude score has an association with monthly pocket money, type of family and dietary pattern. This association was calculated by chi square test. Therefore the research hypothesis H3 has been accepted. Result

The results of major findings indicated that PU students had inadequate knowledge in various aspects of junk food and its hazards and less attitude regarding the hazards of junk food. The power point presentation regarding the junk food and their hazards were found to be a very effective method of providing information regarding the junk food and their hazards and be able to change their attitude slightly. The effectiveness of the power point presentation can understand from the post test knowledge and attitude score of the experimental and the control group.

Conclusion and Recommendation

The findings of the study support the need to conduct education regarding the junk food and their hazards to the students. This study has proved that the PU students have remarkable increase in knowledge due to the effectiveness of ‘Structured Teaching Programme’. Thus, for the future health of the children we should improve their knowledge by conducting periodic teaching programmes on the common junk food and their hazards.

39 Suggestions of the Study The investigator emphasizes on the following suggestions: 1. The findings of the present study indicate that Structured Teaching Programme is more effective when implemented during training for the students.

2. Community health nurses can conduct the periodic health education to the students regarding the hazards of unhealthy eating habits.

3. This study also suggests that a school health nurse should be appointed in all the schools so that they can educate the students properly.

References 1. Anita Goyal, N.P. Singh, "Consumer perception about fast food in India: An Exploratory Study", British Food Journal, Vol. 109 Issue: 2, 2007, page, 182 – 195.

2. Marie-Pierre St-Onge, Kathleen L. Keller and Steven B. Heymsfield, Changes in childhood food consumption patterns: a cause for concern in light of increasing body weights, American Journal of Clinical Nutrition, Vol. 78, No. 6, page 1068-1073.

3. Punam J R articles various/Junk-Food, 2007,children-and-junk-food.

4. Gary Pearson, “effects of junk food on health” www.articlealley.com/article

5. www.fao.org/docrep, World Agriculture: Towards 2015/2030. Summary report. Rome, Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations, 2002.

6. Rohini Rangarajan, 27/02/2009.- Child Health, Consumption Patterns, Down to Earth..

7. Gary Ruskin and Juliet Schor , August 12, 2005- “The Nation”.

8. Daniel Workman-, Aug 29, 2007- “Top 10 List Of Frequent Fast Food Eaters Globally”.

9. Punam J R-, Feb 2007- Article on “Is Junk Food Healthy?”

10. Goodwin, Jenifer. - Week, March 29, 2010- Real. Business.

11. Kim Evans, citizen journalist, Monday, April 12, 2010- Junk Food Found to Deteriorate Pleasure Center of Brain.

40 A Study of Traditional Sri Lankan Batik Design and Application on Waistcoats for Men Hemalatha I. Doddamani1 & Kasun Seneviratne2

Abstract

This article is to introduce the influence of Sri Lankan vector graphics batik on waistcoats for men’s wear to give rebirth to the traditional batik industry by providing a modern look and targeting the young national and international clients who crave for the new look in the traditional wear. Batik is a cloth that is traditionally made using a manual wax-resist dyeing technique. Batik is a wax resist fiber art. Hot wax is applied to the fabric in a design. The wax serves as a resistant, preventing the dye from reaching the fabric where it was applied. This technique can be applied in layers with different colors. The Batik effect is unique in that the wax cracks during handling either intentionally or not. In each dye bath, the cracks in the wax allow the dye to reach the fabric creating the unique batik effect. In one form or another, batik has worldwide popularity. Batik or fabrics with the traditional batik patterns are found in (particularly) Indonesia, Malaysia, Japan, China, India, Sri Lanka, Egypt, Nigeria, Senegal, and Singapore. But each country has its own unique motifs, colour combinations and special techniques which make them different from each other.

1. Assistant Professor, Department of Fashion and Apparel Design, T. John College. 2. Student, Department of Fashion and Apparel Design, T. John College.

41 At present in Sri Lankan the batik industry is effectively carried out in places such as Kandy, Kegalle, Yakkala, Kadawatha, Imbulgoda, Nittambuwa, Beruwala and some places along the Kandy Road while batik is also produced in Hikkaduwa, Kalutara, Beruwala, Ambalangoda on the Galle Road. The growth of tourism industry after the end of the northern and the eastern regions’ war situations in Sri Lanka has provided a boost to the country’s batik industry. It has created a high demand for the batik garments after 2006. The industry was further expanded after the war due to the increased demand for local batiks from foreign buyers, especially from USA, UK, France and Japan. Many villagers started batik workshops in their homes as self-employment ventures. The current statistics reveal that over 200,000 people, especially females are engaged in the batik industry all over the country. The Sri Lankan batik industry is making a strong comeback and is poised to be a US $ one billion export earning industry in two years. One of the pioneering legends in the industry, Eric Suriyasena, Chairman of Eric Suriyasena Batiks (Pvt.) Ltd said that the main reason for business to rebound is the growth in tourism. “With tourism picking up there is a tendency in sales picking up locally as well,” he added. He said that currently the trade’s earnings are around US $ 300 million and the main sales are overseas.

Keywords: Batik, Art, Culture, Designs, Textiles, Clothing.

Introduction

The word batik is thought to be derived from the word 'am batik' which when translated means 'a cloth with little dots'. The suffix 'tik' means a little dot, drop, point or to make dots. Batik may also originate from the Javanese word 'tritik' which describes a resistant process for dying where the patterns are reserved on the textiles by tying and sewing areas prior to dying, similar to tie dye techniques.

Batik is a wax resistant fiber art. Hot wax is applied to fabric in a design. The wax serves as a resistant preventing the dye from reaching the fabric where it was applied. This technique can be applied in layers with different colors.

The Batik effect is unique in that the wax cracks during handling, either intentionally or not. In each dye bath, the cracks in the wax allow the dye to reach

42 the fabric creating the unique batik effect. Batik can be done on cottons, silks and other natural fabrics. "Faux" batik employs other types of resists particularly water soluble ones that are easier to remove than wax but never quite achieve the same beautiful crackling. Dharma Porcine MX Fiber Reactive Dyes are the dyes of choice for batik on cotton because they are used with cold water.

Batik masters employ the process of repeated waxing and tub dyeing to achieve their final result. This method involves an understanding of color mixing and over dyeing as each layer of dye is applied over the last producing a new color. After many different applications, the background tends towards dark brown, black or grey. The waxed areas remain lighter in shades produced by each individual dye application and combinations thereof.

In traditional batik art, they use traditional motives like elephant motif, peacock motif, traditional geometrical motifs. And in the dye bath system the number of colours in batik represents how many times it was immersed in the dye bath and how many times wax had to be applied and removed because of the toughness of this method the number of colors which we can use for a design is limited and the final colours which we can achieve are very dark leading to a number of cause high wastage of dye and chemicals. A multicolored batik involves a lot more work than a single or two coloured piece. The innumerable processes of dye are usually reflected in the price of the cloth because of the above difficulties and the tradition of different colours and designs the use of which for batik is limited.

The technique I use in this case study “Application of vector graphics on silk batik beach party wear”, is a paint-on method .This method allows for great variations of colours and shades without having to master the complicated blending of successive layers of color. Wax is applied to outlines and other portions of the design that are to remain white later. Dye is then painted on in many colors to areas inside the waxed lines, allowed to set and the fabrics then apply the chemicals to fix the color. After it gets dried properly, fabric washed and dried. The whole design can then be waxed over and the background is dyed either by painting or immersing the fabric in a dye solution (the tub dye method). This technique eliminates the innumerable processes of dyeing so that it reduces the wastage of dyes and chemicals. It is a time saving method and it is not affecting the brightness of the colour.

Vector graphics is the use of geometrical primitives such as points, lines, curves and shapes or polygon(s), which are all based on mathematical expressions to represent images in computer graphics. "Vector", in this context, implies more than a straight line. Vector graphics are based on vectors (also called paths, or strokes) which lead through locations called control points. Each of these points

43 has a definite position on the x and y axes of the work plan. Each point is a variety of database including the location of the point in the work space and the direction of the vector (which is what defines the direction of the track). Each track can be assigned a colour, a shape, a thickness and also a fill. This does not affect the size of the files in a substantial way because all the information resides in the structure. It describes how to draw the vector. The tradition and innovation blend together, the result is astounding and that's the case with batik too. I tried this by applying vector graphics on silk beach party wear which gives a new modern look to the traditional batik garment. I replaced the traditional Kantians and saris by fashionable silhouettes like halter neck frocks, tube tops, funky elephant pants and bikinis to bring my collection closer to my target customers. Normally, traditional batik designs are bold and big. The colour combinations I use play the main role. I use light crispy and trendy colors. My target customers are young national and international clients who crave for new look in the traditional beach party wear.

Sri Lankan Batik

Batik is known as a decorating art of fabric. It is done by pouring liquid wax on fabrics and later proceeds with dipping it in dye but it does not go through the wax as a result those difficult colourful motifs will be left behind. The traditional batik artisans of Sri Lanka are inspired by objects like animals, flowers, birds or mystical symbols, local tribal (Vedas) life and local mythological themes are also vastly used in this tremendous art of batik. Sri Lanka is an island of life and colour. The colourfulness of this island is reflected on the art and culture. This vivid and kaleidoscopic art form of Sri Lanka surely beholds the pleasure of wearing for each and every single wearer. Although the place of birth of the art form is Indonesia, the culture and the preferences of this art form have been in practice since decades and now it has become a strongly bound culture of the Sri Lankan soil. The cottage industry of the island depends a lot on Batik art. The craft of batik arts includes that smooth outstanding handwork on cloth paintings, which are made of dyes and dye opposing wax materials. The designs like craft on Buddha batiks of the island has even hit the retail market of global fashion in a considerable manner.

The word "Batik" is a Javanese word which means “writing/drawing with wax”. Although origins of this sharp craft have been traced back to India and according to the records dating over 2000 years ago, “Batik” came into its own as more than just another handicraft only after it was introduced to Indonesia by early traders who travelled between the countries through the sea. China, Myanmar, Japan, Philippines, Sri Lanka, Malaysia and Thailand have also developed

44 major Batik industries with their own ways and techniques, signature colours and designs. In common, Batik is a method of decorating fabric by covering a portion of it with a layer of wax and then dyeing the fabric. The waxed areas keep their original colour and when the wax is removed the contrast between the dyed and the un-dyed areas create the breath-taking patterns. The technique of batik has been used for centuries, evidences to prove the early existence of batik has been discovered in ancient Egyptian tombs which date back to the first century as well as to the Middle East, India, Asia at large and Africa. By the 19th century, batik had become a highly developed art form in both the Indonesian islands of Java and Bali. In fact, the word batik is extracted from two words in Javanese: Amba (to write) and Titik (dot). Even today, some of the finest batik fabrics are made in Java.

The Dutch colonizers introduced Batik to Sri Lanka as Indonesia which was also an archipelago of "Dutch ruled islands" at that time would have influenced the existing art-form in Sri Lanka through the Dutch colonizers. The methods and the style of Batik-making practiced in Sri Lanka today have remained unchanged throughout the centuries. The key to this art-form has been passed down from generation to generation. The creation of Batik was initially an elitist craft only with noble families of the Kandyan court practicing it as a leisure activity. It gained sufficient popularity to let the artisans take up the craft and soon the regional banners, wall tapestries and even the "somana" dress of the Kandyan nobility was developed using the Batik process. The British colonial rulers introduced English-made cotton and linen to Sri Lanka and sooner the local process of manufacturing fabric from hand-woven textile materials to Batik creations declined and all of it disappeared from the society’s memory. A small community of people continued to create Batik as a cottage industry and they handed down the process and designs from generation to generation for over a century. Batik and its creation as well as an appreciation of the art came as the spirit of nationalism which swept through the country soon after winning Independence over the British. But statistically it was the tourism growth in the late 1960s and the early 1990s which gave a much needed boost to help the industry blossom into a highly valued handicraft. Sri Lankan Batik is made using either pure cotton or silk fabric and each step of the process is still done by hand by skilled workers. The designs are traced on to the fabric and afterwards the chroming process begins on the areas of the design which need to retain the colour that is on the fabric. It is perfectly covered in hot wax with the help of Janting (Wax dripping pen) and then the fabric is dyed (it’s a three bath process: the first is a chemical one to help the fabric absorb the hues, the second is a sodium chloride bath to ensure the color is still on the body and finally the coloured dye). This process is repeated for each color and usually they start with the lightest color (white) and progress to the darkest (black).

45 Once they are through with the dyeing process, the fabric is put in boiling water and the wax is easily removed from the fabric. The unique “veins” of chromes found in Batik are created when the dye seeps into the fabric during the dyeing process. This can happen naturally or crumpled by hand to allow the veins to become a part of the design.

Figure 1: Figure 2:- Stylized Motif Traditional Sri Lankan Motif

The uniqueness of Batik as an art form is in this wax-application process unlike the block printing method, hand made batik produces a unique design each time even if the same design is being repeated. The wax is applied using different tools depending on the intricacy of the wax work required from the fine-nib copper tint to a broader nib or small brushes and even a home-made coarse brush of coir rope for the sections which need splatters of wax “spots”, If you have been to South and East Asia you may already be familiar with this unique craft of fabric dying. Sri Lankan Batik wear comes in designs that are unique to the island but nevertheless very colourful and intricate from sarongs to shirts and cushion covers to dresses. In our method, a design drawn on fabric, painted with wax, dipped in a boiling pot of dye, with a scale of color in a kaleidoscope brings out ‘Batik’. The innovative motifs are unique with the island’s contemporary art and psychedelic marvels and its close link to nature and to mythology. The natural beauty found on land and in the ocean is a popular design inspiration while scenes of daily life whether its stilt fishermen, a rural village farmer's scene or elephants bathing in a river are all captured carefully in intricate detail. More traditional designs, from religious ceremonies such as the annual "Esala Perahera" in uphill’s (Kandy) or motifs from temples and palaces are also very famous. These designs are captured in everything from wall hangings and banners to cushion covers and

46 bedspreads. Using two or three colours or dozens of colours these Batik creations continue to be a popular purchase among locals as well as an increasing number of tourists. The use of Batik in clothing was somewhat restricted until recently to Kandyan style saris for females (usually in a three piece set which was easy to wear) and loose shirts and sarongs for males. These designs are usually in two colors – a bright colour combined with black - which are stylized designs based on the flora and the fauna or abstract geometric patterns. Most importantly, the modern day young fashion designers (a younger generation of designers) have been introducing Batik into contemporary clothing, creating a revival in the appreciation of Batik amongst young crowd using contemporary combinations of hues, modern designs and the best in cotton, silk or voile fabric. These designer creations are part of a move by the country’s creative community to reinterpret traditional culture and make it accessible to a more larger and concrete industry.

Process of Batik Painting

Pre-washing your Fabric- Pre–washing of the fabric is done by textile detergent and/or an enzyme detergent. This removes most oils, sizing and pre-shrinking the fabric allowing the dyes to adhere better. It also gets out excess of dyes better and faster. Bleaching is done if it is needed

Stretching the Fabric- This is the easiest on a stretcher wooden frame that will keep the fabric flat, horizontal and suspended. Use the stainless steel push pins or silk thumbtacks to stretch the fabric. You can also use a steel frame for the purpose.

Melting the Wax- The premixed Batik wax, soy wax or your own combinations of beeswax, sticky wax and paraffin wax can be used. The more of paraffin and the more the wax will crackle. The beeswax and the sticky wax do not crackle by themselves and the paraffin crackles too much. The wax mixture should be melted in a double boiler, electric wax pot or old electric frying pan set at about 220-240° (CAREFUL! If you heat the wax over 240°, it can give off toxic smoke or burst into flames!). One should work with these kinds of hot waxes in a well- ventilated area (they give off toxic fumes) and never leave hot wax unattended. In case of emergency, you can douse the flames with baking soda but NOT water. One should never use pots directly on the stove! Soy wax is what we use which can be melted in a double boiler and at a much lower temperature than the other waxes. It is also water soluble and can be completely removed with the soapy hot water.

Apply the Wax- Using tools like the tainting (also known as canting) to make outlines. You can also use a paint brush with natural bristles to produce painted

47 strokes, metal cookie cutters to stamp designs or anything else that you can think of to produce an interesting pattern (remember, soy wax is water based and will wash off easily). Thin layers of very hot wax will often allow some dye to stain the fabric under the wax whereas a thick buildup will keep the wax off. When applying the wax regulate the temperature so that it penetrates the fabric, not so cool that it sits on top and not so hot that all of your lines are spread out. The wax should have a clear appearance, indicating it has penetrated to the other side. When done, check the back of the piece and apply a little wax on those areas where it hasn't penetrated. If you do not ensure that it has gone through the fabric it will bleed when you paint it and you will lose the detail of the design.

There are 3 main techniques used in applying the wax;

Tub Dye Technique

After the initial wax has been applied the fabric is ready for the first dye bath. Traditionally dying was done in earthenware tubs. Today most batik factories use large concrete vats. Above the vats are ropes with pulleys that the fabric is draped over after it has been dipped into the dye bath.

The waxed fabric is immersed in the dye bath of the first colour. The amount of time for which it is left in the bath determines the hue of the colour; darker colours require longer periods or numerous immersions. The fabric is then put into a cold water bath to harden the wax.

When the desired colour has been achieved and the fabric has dried, the wax is reapplied over the areas that the artisan wishes to maintain in the colour of the first dye or another colour at a later stage in the dying process.

When an area that has been covered with wax previously needs to be exposed so that it can be dyed, the applied wax is scraped away with a small knife. The area is then sponged with hot water and resized with rice starch before it is re- immersed in the subsequent dye bath.

If a marble effect is desired the wax is intentionally cracked before being placed in the dye bath. The dye seeps into the tiny cracks that create the fine lines that are characteristic of batik. Traditionally, cracks were a sign of inferior cloth especially on indigo color batik. On brown batik, however, the marble effect was accepted.

The number of colors in batik represents how many times it was immersed in the dye bath and how many times wax had to be applied and removed. A

48 multicolored batik represents a lot more work than a single or two coloured piece. Innumerable dye processes are usually reflected in the price of the cloth. Nowadays, chemical dyes have pretty much replaced traditional dyes so colours are endless and much more liberally used.

"Faux" Batik

A second method is so called "Faux" batik. It employs other types of resists instead of hot wax. Not only are the resists easy and safe to work with but they can be washed out with plain water because of that they may not be submerged in a dye bath. Instead, dye or thin fabric paints can be applied with brushes or sprayed on etcetera fixed according to their directions and the whole thing can be later washed out. If paints are used, they are totally non-toxic, and there are no associated chemicals

Paint-on Method Paint-on method will be used for waistcoats. This method has fewer steps and allows for great variations of color and shade without having to master the complicated blending of successive layers of color. Wax is applied to outlines and other portions of the design that are to remain white later. Dye is then painted on in many colors to areas inside the waxed lines, allowed to set and the fabric is washed and dried. The whole design can then be waxed over and the background is dyed by either painting or immersing the fabric in a dye solution (the tub dye method).

The final step is to remove all the wax, first by scraping and then by boiling. The hydrochloric acid is used to fix the colors and the sun helps to brighten the colours too.

Method, Material & Products Tools Used in Batik Although the art form of batik is very intricate the tools that are used are very simple. The Canting

The canting is a tool to draw or paint with a malam candle drawing onto the mori. The canting determines the name of batik that will be produced to become

49 the drawing batik. This tool is made from the mixture of copper and wood or bamboo which is flexible and light.

Canting can be classified into:

1) According to the function - Canting Reng-rengan

The canting reng-rengan is used to make batik reng-rengan. Reng-rengan (ngengrengan) is first a drawing according to the pattern before it’s done further. The person who makes batik reng-rengan is called ngengreng. The pattern is the drawing which is used as a model sample. Reng-rengan means framework. Usually canting reng-rengan is used especially to make its pattern framework while isen or the content of the part in which batik is made uses canting isen according to the content of the part wanted. Batik from the result of taking the sample from the batik pattern framework or together with the content is called Polan. The canting reng-rengan has a singular and middle tip. - Canting Isen

Canting isen is canting to make the content or to fill polan. The canting isen has either singular or double small tip.

2) According to how big is the tip canting can be differentiated into : - Small canting carat (tip) - Middle canting carat - Big canting carat

3) According to the number of carat (tip) canting can be differentiated into : - Canting cecekan.

The canting cecekan has one tip, small, and is used to make small dots (Javanese: cecek). A person who makes the dots by using canting cecekan is called “nyeceki”. Besides to make small dots for the content, canting cecekan is also used to make small lines. - Canting loron.

Loron derives from the word loro which means two. This canting has double tips, up and down to make double lines. - Canting telon

50 - Canting prapatan Prapatan is from the word four. So this canting has four tips used for making four dots forming a square as content. - Canting liman Liman means five. This canting has five tips to make a small rectangle which is made from four lines and one dot in the middle. -. Canting byok

Canting byok is canting that has seven tips or more used for forming a small circle containing dots; a dot or more, according to the amounts of the tips or how small or big the circle is. Canting byok usually has odd tips - Canting renteng or galaran.

Galaran derives from the word galar, a bed made from bamboo which is formed horizontally. Renteng is a set of things in lines, the way to arrange it is by pricking.

Canting galaran or renteng always has even tips; four tips or more: maximally six tips, arranged from the bottom and up. Telon is from the word three. It has three tips with the form of a triangle. If canting telon is used for making batik so it will be seen in a triangle which is formed from three dots as its content.

Frames – These can be bought or made depending on the size and the adjustability. It is possible to use stretcher bars or old picture frames; however, softwood is preferred as it enables the fabric to be pinned. To reduce the risk of tears of silks and finer fabrics it is possible to use masking tape to secure the material to the frame.

Wax Pot – This is the most efficient and effective way of heating and melting the wax. This can be electric, gas or oil.

Brushes – The varied sizes of cheap oil brushes are advised for use with wax. Stiff bristles prove beneficial when pushing the wax into the surface of the material. Brushes made from natural or synthetic fibers are also required in the dying process. It is important to remember that after their use these brushes containing wax cannot be reused for painting or dyeing.

Tjantings – Traditional batik tools used to draw precise lines of wax onto the material. These are available in a range of sizes which allow a small amount of wax to flow from the reservoir. An electrically heated Tjanting is now available in the form of a modified soldering iron.

51 Other- A selection of soft pencils, masking tape, dress making pins, drawing pins, a large saucepan, metal bucket (large enough for batik to be immersed), plastic buckets, wooden tongs, cleaning solvents, plastic pegs, teaspoons, jam jars, greaseproof paper, tracing paper, tissue, rubber gloves, apron, newspaper etcetera.

A Dye Bath – Any suitable container which will allow the batik to be kept flat when submerged can be used for wax as it is thermostatically controlled.

Dyes

Traditional colors for Central Javanese batik were made from natural ingredients and consisted primarily of beige, blue, brown and black.

The oldest colour that was used in traditional batik making was blue. The colour was made from the leaves of the indigo plant. The leaves were mixed with molasses of sugar and lime and left to stand overnight. Sometimes sap from the Tinggi tree was added to act as a fixing agent. The lighter blue was achieved by leaving the cloth in the dye bath for short periods of time. For darker colours, the cloth would be left in the dye bath for days and may have been submerged up to 8 - 10 times a day.

In the traditional batik, the second colour applied was a brown colour called soga. The colour could range from a light yellow to a dark brown. The dye came from the bark of the Soga tree. Another colour that was traditionally used was a dark red color called mengkuda. This dye was created from the leaves of the Morinda Citrifolia. The final hue depended on how long the cloth was soaked in the dye bath and how often it was dipped. The skilled artisans can create many variations of these traditional colours. Apart from blue, green would be achieved by mixing blue and yellow, purple was obtained by mixing blue and red. The soga brown colour mixed with indigo would produce a dark blue-black colour.

Cold Water Dyes – A range of coloured dyes in powder form and an appropriate fixing agent recommended by the products’ manufacturer.

Frames – These can be bought or made depending on the size and the adjustability. It is possible to use the stretcher bars or old picture frames, however, softwood is preferred as it enables the fabric to be pinned. To reduce the risk of tears in silks and finer fabrics it is possible to use masking tape to secure the material to the frame.

52 Wax – This is available in a number of forms such as blocks, flakes or grains. A beginner is advised that paraffin wax is the easiest to use, however, beeswax offers less opportunity for cracking. A specialist batik wax is a mixture of both paraffin and beeswax.

Electric Wax Pot – This is the most efficient and effective way of heating and melting wax as it is thermostatically controlled.

Brushes – The varied sizes of cheap oil brushes are advised for use with wax. Stiff bristles prove beneficial when pushing the wax into the surface of the material. The brushes made from natural or synthetic fibers are also required in the dying process. It is important to remember that after use the brushes containing wax cannot be reused for painting or dyeing.

Tjantings – Traditional batik tools used to draw precise lines of wax onto the material. These are available in a range of sizes which allow a small amount of wax to flow from the reservoir. An electrically heated Tjanting is now available in the form of a modified soldering iron. (Figure 3)

A Dye Bath – Any suitable container which will allow the batik to be kept flat when submerged can be used.

A Selection of Soft Pencils- masking tape, dress making pins, drawing pins, a large saucepan, a metal bucket (large enough for batik to be immersed), plastic buckets, wooden tongs, cleaning solvents, plastic pegs, teaspoons, jam jars, greaseproof paper, tracing paper, tissue, rubber gloves, apron, newspaper etcetera.

53 Figure 4:- Sri Lankan Batik (Traditional motifs) on trendy Designer Men’s Waistcoats

• Conclusion: - Sri Lankan Batik is a very old art. The use of “Batik” in clothing was restricted to three piece set saris for females and loose shirts and sarongs for the males. These designs are stylized based on the flora and the fauna or the abstract geometric patterns. These can be blended to give any clothing national/international acceptance. These traditional motifs in batik could be introducing into contemporary clothing creating a revival in the appreciation of “Batik” amongst the young crowd using contemporary combinations of hues, modern designs and the best in cotton, silk or voile fabric. These designer creations are part of a move by the country’s creative community to reinterpret traditional culture and make it accessible to a more larger and concrete industry.

References Books

1. Harvard University. (2008). The Gentleman's Magazine and Historical Review. 59 (2).

54 2. Shifrin, Lourie J. (2001). Batik Beauties: 18 Stunning Quilts. Bothell: Martingale and Company. Websites

1. http://handybathikbab.blogspot.in/2013_02_01_archive.html

2. http://www.uniquebatiks.com

3. http://www.batikguild.org.uk

4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Batik_industry_in_Sri_Lanka

5. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Waistcoat

6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/History_of_suits

7. www.waistcoatsdirect.co.uk/articles/waistcoat-history.asp

8. http://gentlemansgent.blogspot.in/2012/02/waistcoat-part-1.html Written by Daniel Ireson Tuesday, 14 February 2012

9. http://www.mensfashionmagazine.com/fashion-basics-how-to-wear-a- waistcoat by Daniel Riding December 20, 2013

55 Work Life Balance: A Good Organizational Practice Lalitha P.1

Abstract

Work – life balance of employees has become an important subject since the times have changed from women earning the family living in today’s world where both men and women equally share the responsibility of earning for the betterment of their family life. So it is necessary to know how the employees balance the professional and the domestic life. People in India have broken barriers and built bridges in the professional platforms. Work-Life balance focuses on two main aspects of profession called achievement and enjoyment. This means that employees should be able to have job satisfaction (enjoyment) and at the same time be able to grow up in his career (achievement). When an employee is able to achieve and enjoy her professional and personal life it means he/she has a positive work-life balance. The challenges like global competition, personal lives/family values and an aging workforce are playing a vital role in the present work/life balance practices in the present business environment, overcoming these challenges make organizations more competitive and productive.

Keywords: Work Life Conflict, Inter-Role Conflict, Work Life Enrichment, Work Life Interface.

1. Assistant Professor, Department of Management Studies, T. John College.

56 Introduction Work–life balance has come to the forefront of policy making in the developed countries in recent years against an environment of globalization, rapid technological change, ageing population and concerns over labour market participation rates in the present scenario It can be defined as ‘the relationship between the institutional and cultural times and spaces of work and non-work in societies where income is predominantly generated and distributed through labour markets’. Work–life balance practices in the workplace are therefore those that intentionally or otherwise increase the flexibility and autonomy of the worker in negotiating their attention (time) and presence in the workplace while work–life balance policies exist where those practices are intentionally designed and implemented.

Existing literature provides the work–life interface in terms of three issues: time management, inter-role conflict (role overload and interference) and care arrangements for dependents. The preferences are shaped not only by individual values and predispositions but also by current reality and objective factors within each individual's life. There is usually compromise towards optimum feasibility.

Need of the Hour - WLB: The employment scenario is marked by the quick change, intense pressure, constant declines, changing demographics, increased use of technology and the coexisting virtual workplace. The increase in average income, rise in standard of living and organizational human resource requirements have made individuals demand for a better work atmosphere.

The demographic changes in the form of an increased number of women in the workforce, breakage of joint family system and urbanization have ended up insisting on balanced work life practices in the organizations.

The technological advancement resulted in increased dependence on the use of internet and the telecommunication facilities. As a result, many people at all the levels are taking work outside office which has minimized the boundary between work and family. The environmental changes are evidenced in increasing number of firms in the services sector (NASSCOM News line , 2008a), which require employees to work longer, frequently interact with customers and work across varied time zones which dilutes the boundary between work and family.

The organizations not providing real opportunity for employees’ work/life balance are opening themselves up to increasing numbers of dissatisfied and

57 unproductive employees and hence increased attrition rates. Further, there is a need for the employers and the employees to find flexible and innovative solutions that maximize productivity without damaging employees well–being, their family relationships and other aspects of life. It is also a challenge to bridge the gap in this area by highlighting the relevance and importance of the work–life balance for leadership, senior management, individuals and organizations.

The existing literature provides the work–life interface in terms of three issues: time management; inter-role conflict (role overload and interference) and care arrangements for dependents. The preferences are shaped not only by individual values and predispositions but also by current reality and objective factors within each individual's life. There is usually a compromise towards optimum feasibility. Present Scenario

The European surveys suggest that a mismatch between the desired and the actual hours is increasing with possible adverse consequences for employees' well-being and performance at work. It is widely recognized that even where work–life balance measures are widely available in organizations such measures are not necessarily utilized. The take-up has been linked to the factors that make up the organizational work–life culture such as the extent of manager and co- worker support, the career consequences of taking a work–life balance measure, organizational time expectations and gendered perceptions of policy use. The degree of use is also variable across groups of staff in an organization. These measures are often targeted at highly expert people in an effort to recruit and retain key staff. However, those with executive responsibilities can find it difficult to take up work–life measures whether because of explicit exclusions or because in practice they have to do whatever it takes to get the job done. More broadly, changing organizational structures, flexible work organization (lean production and supply chain management in manufacturing and retailing and new service requirements in both public and private sector services) and work intensification throw up new challenges to work–life balance in the new economy.

Organizational structures and cultures undermine formal work–life balance policies leaving those who take them up as undervalued and marginalized. Gradual measures that do not tackle organizational cultures may also reinforce gender separation in the workplace since the take-up of work–life balance measures is strongly gendered. Women with dependent children are most likely to take up measures such as part-time working and other reduced working-hour arrangements and school term-time working (public sector) is almost exclusively female. A number of barriers appear to limit men's take-up of such measures: the organization of the place of work, the business environment and the domestic

58 organization of labour in employees' homes ‘Organizational Career Cultures’ prevent men from overtly choosing a work–life balance over their career. Consequently, men are often found using informal flexibility or taking advantage of gender-neutral flexibility such as flexible time systems to improve their work–life balance at the margins.

Organizational cultures thus tend to reinforce the traditional separation of gender roles leading to a division between the working experiences of men and women. Such organizational practices are established within and influenced by gendered societal norms about the ‘ideal career’ and capitalism's norm of the ‘ideal worker’ usually defined in terms of presence and commitment.

It looks through the ways in which both men and women negotiate the relationship between work and home life particularly when they have caring responsibilities at home. It explores the relationship between formal policies and their impact on men and women's ability to select a choice in shaping their careers and their day-to-day commitments. The structural constraint of an organizational culture which emphasizes employee availability, particularly through geographical mobility and which is disruptive to family formation as a result forces managers, especially women to make choices about work and family. On the other hand, they find evidence of women developing strategies that enable them either to conform or bypass organizational norms.

No specific work–life balance policies are in evidence in the organization under study although it has attempted to address the gender imbalance at higher levels through targeted recruitment policies. Sometimes policies are inadequate to deal with both the highly formal recruitment and promotion procedures based on educational attainment through competition and the informal processes that favour ‘unencumbered’ workers or those with the kinds of relational resources making it possible for their spouse to follow them. Part-time work is devalued in career terms. Thus, the typical career pattern absolutely assumes that managers are male. Moreover, organizational practices are based on an underlying set of traditional gender values regarding the household division of labour which appears to be unchallenged in human resources practice.

In several countries, flexible working arrangements are advocated as a means of balancing work and other commitments and thus reducing work–life conflict and work pressure. Based on the survey, there is an impact of three main types of flexible work arrangements on employees' perception of work–life stress and their ability to carry out their caring responsibilities. Their basic hypothesis is that flexible work arrangements — flexi time or flexible working hours, part-time work and working from home — will reduce work–life conflict because they

59 give employees greater choice. It is also observed that the take-up of flexibility is gendered, and that women are considerably more likely than men to work part-time or to experience other forms of flexibility that reduce their earnings and men are more likely than women to work from home. The availability of flexi time also depends strongly on the sector with public-sector employees having greater access than others to flexible working hours.

In this study, a reduction in working hours appears to lessen work–life conflict for both men and women. Part-time work is also associated with reduced work pressure but it does so significantly only for women. The relationship between flexi time, reduced work pressure and reduced work–life conflict is significant only in the public sector indicating that the effectiveness of flexible work practices depends on the institutional context. However, those working from home report significantly higher levels of work–life conflict. There exists a negative relationship between working from home and work–home conflict which is partly due to long working hours but also to other factors such as intrusion into family space. The availability and take-up of flexible working arrangements have important consequences for the division of domestic labour.

Techniques: On one side, the current work scenario, intense pressure, constant declines and changing demographics have put pressure on the dual earning parents. And on the other side of the coin, we are ourselves responsible for the present scenario. (1) Personal Values, Beliefs and Life Style for Work-Life Enrichment

Urbanization and westernization have broken joint family system. Moreover, values and beliefs of tolerance, adjustment and respect are lost. In a study, it was found that the working mothers residing with her parents or with her husband’s parents have less stress of work life.

Most of the working couples are not practicing the preaching of our holy books and ‘granths’, for example, to wake up early in the morning, take a bath, meditate and start the day rather than attending late night parties and leading a modernized life style that has made this interface intense. (2) Spirituality and work-life:

Sometimes the projected issues of life and work are because of our attitude towards

60 life and behaviour with others and mismanagement of our time. A large volume of research shows that people who are more religious and spiritual have better mental health and adapt more quickly to health problems compared to those who are less religious and spiritual. These possible benefits to mental health and well-being have physiological consequences that impact physical health, affect the risk of disease and influence response to treatment. Harold G. Koenig 2012 and

James E. Kennedy et al (2003) confirmed in their study that increased spirituality was positively associated with increased well-being, increased sense of meaning and purpose in life, and decreased tendency to become angry.

Also, physical and mental wellness is directly proportional to our eating style, lifestyle, habits, attitude and spirituality. To achieve work - life balance, employees should be pro-active and plan his/her professional and personal schedules well in advance so that both are equally balanced and the end result is satisfactory. The bellow figure represents few strategies to strike work-life balance (WLB).

STAY HEALTHY LOVE YOUR & SELF REWARD LIFE & JOB

WORK LIFE BALANCE PROPER TIME MANAGEMENT

SET GOALS, PLANS, PRIORI- TIZE. POSITIVE/PRO- ACTIVE / PERSONAL ATTITUDE , VALUES

Balancing work and life is not only the liability of employees but employers also need to take initiatives in the existing business environment. (3) Working Time Arrangements

Total working hours and flexibility and for those with parenting or other care responsibilities, parental leave entitlements (maternity, paternity, parental and

61 careers) and childcare (subsidies or direct provision) where these needs are met through organizational work–life programmes, employees are found to have increased organizational commitment and job satisfaction. A greater sense of control over his/her own work schedules leads to improved mental health. Further, work–life programmes that allow employees to have a greater involvement at home appear to be linked to employee well-being for men as well as women. Organizations can benefit in a number of ways including reduced absenteeism and better integration of women returners after maternity. Work–life balance measures can present opportunities for organizations to learn new ways of working.

Where employees' needs are not met, employees are expected to experience work–life stress although it may be that particularly for those without caring responsibilities time stress is partially or wholly offset by other factors such as material rewards or job enjoyment.

Many MNC’s in India and abroad offer programs to help employees manage personal and work commitments as the fast pace of our industry can be demanding. These include caretaker services, backup childcare services and stress-management resources. For example, annual VoW global survey showed that flexible work arrangements are one of the features of the HP work environment that employees value most. These arrangements included:

• Flex time: Working a normal 8-hour workday but adjusting start and finish times.

• Part time: Working reduced hours on an ongoing or temporary basis about 2% of employees work part time.

• Telework: Working full time from home.

• Flexwork: Occasionally working from home but primarily based on HP premises. Additional programs that help employees improve work- life balance vary by country which includes:

• Adoption resources and assistance • Dependent care resources • Education resources • Family and medical leave • New parent leave • Vacation and paid time off

62 (4) Family Friendly Initiatives to Resolve Work-life Interfaces

“A family friendly firm is the one that has flexible work plans and provides such child care / parental care. This often involves a companywide initiative to improve quality and productivity. Family-friendly policies can help employees to balance the work and family responsibilities, yield benefits for themselves, for their families, and their employers. Family-friendly policies can benefit employers also can help them in retaining highly skilled employees, who might otherwise leave the organization. It can also decrease absenteeism, enhance productivity, and can improve employers’ attraction ability. (5) Formal Organizational Initiatives: To frame formal work-life balance initiatives is the need of the hour for the HR professionals. These socio demographic changes place pressure on firms to be proactive in addressing issues concerned with work-life balance including the provision of family friendly workplace arrangements. The favoured companies are those which have formal friendly initiatives to balance WLB. We can divide these initiatives into two parts viz.: a) Work restructuring programs where provisions like reformation of jobs and duties, telecommuting arrangements, part-time and job sharing opportunities and flexible work scheduling programs are included. b) Employees’ promote policies where employees are made to relax and are helped to take care of their dependents while doing their job along with an uninterrupted career.

In many of the developed counties such as facilities like on-site child care and or care for the elderly people, child care / elder care subsidies and /or referral services, paid family and medical leave, release time work to participate in school and community events and limits on business travels are provided.

In India, only a few MNCs and prominent ITES companies are providing the facilities of flexible location (telecommuting) and time facilities but these facilities are widely used in the developed counties. (6) Creating Family Friendly Supportive Work Culture:

According to social exchange theory by offering informal family friendly culture the organizations demonstrate their efforts in favour of the well-being of their employees. Informal initiatives are the support given by family members, colleagues and supervisors to decrease the load and or stress of work-life interface and which is not part of written rules and regulations.

63 Conclusion

The current work scenario marked by the fast pace of change, extreme pressure, constant declines, changing demographics, increased use of technology has affected the lives of employees. Present workforce consists of many working fathers and mothers whose aim is to find a balance between work and family roles which is a matter of high concern for them and the organizations.

Work-life balance has implications for employee attitudes, behaviours, well-being as well as organizational effectiveness. So to frame formal work-life balance initiatives for the well being of the employees and organizations is the prerequisite for the organizations and HR professionals.

References: 1. Human Resource & Personnel Management, K. Aswathappa, Fourth edition, the McGraw – Hill companies. Pg.: 620-636.

2. “Strategic Human Resource Management & Development”, Richard Regis, First edition, Excel books, Pg.: 161 – 216.

3. Fang Tai Tseng. (2012), ‘Win-Win Human Resource Strategies for Working- Hours Reduction’, The Indian Journal of Industrial Relations, Vol. 47, No. 3, January 2012.

4. Deepak Chawala, & Neena Sondhi. (2011), ‘Assessing Work-Life Balance Among Indian Women Professionals’, The Indian Journal of Industrial Relations, Vol. 47, No. 2, October 2011.

64 Tamil Nadu Tourism Marketing from the Year of 2011-2015: A Service Marketing Perspective K.P. Yuvaraj1 & Jasty P. Joy2

Abstract Tourism today is a great phenomenon involving movement of millions of people all over the world. The marketability of individual destinations and global tourism is vulnerable to sudden changes in the market perceptions. An act of man or nature can transform the reputation, desirability and marketability overnight. The components of tourism, tourism marketing mix, market segmentation and market research are the key factors deciding the success of the destination. In India, Tamil Nadu is one of the important destinations for international and domestic tourists with its unique nature, beauty, rich culture, fairs, festivals and heritage. To make the tourism a great success one has to utilize the marketing technology and strategies to the full extent. This article is an attempt to review the different service marketing approaches adopted by the Tamil Nadu Tourism Department for the development and their impact on the marketing polices.

Keywords: Market Segmentation, Market Research Tourism Marketing Mix.

State of Tourism in Tamil Nadu

The state of Tamil Nadu has a great potential to become a preferred destination worldwide. With an area of 130,058 sq. ft. and a population of over 55 million,

1. Assistant Professor, Department of Hotel Management, T. John College. 2. Assistant Professor, Department of Hotel Management, T. John College.

65 Tamil Nadu is the seventh largest populated and third most industrialized state in India. It boasts successfully of a tourism infrastructure, next to its western border Karnataka and also enjoys a long unbroken coastline in the Bay of Bengal. Tamil Nadu has its glorious culture and history. Tamil Nadu is one of the centres of world civilizations. It is the home of Dravidian art and culture characterized by its distinctive music and dances, its amazingly decorated temples with their soaring towers and its plentiful and colourful festivals.

Tamil literature describes the geography of the regions in the State as Kurinchi, Mullai, Marudham, Neithaland Paalai. The confluence of the Arabian Sea, Bay of Bengal and Indian Ocean merging in the southern tip of the state is a visual treat at Kanniyakumari. The development of modern port sand business centres has given a fillip to trade and industry in the modern times. The connectivity of the state with the rest of the country and the world through its modern airports and roads makes Tamil Nadu an important commercial destination today.

Tourism Marketing

Tourism marketing being a service product has to adopt the service marketing principles.

Differences between Tourism Marketing and Other Services

The marketing of services is dependent much on interdependence of marketing, operations and human resources

The differences between tourism marketing and other services are:

(1) The principle products provided by recreation/tourism businesses are recreational experiences and hospitality.

(2) Instead of moving the product to the customer, the customer must travel to the product (area/community).

(3) Travel is a significant portion of the time and money spent in association with the recreational and the tourism experiences.

(4) It is a major factor in people's decisions on whether or not to visit your business or community.

66 Characteristics of Service Marketing

According to Lovelock, service marketing has four characteristics. They are: (a) Intangibility i.e. cannot be touched or viewed (b) Inseparability of Production and Consumption, (c) Perishability, that is, unused capacity cannot be stored for future use and (d) Heterogeneity (Variability), that is, services which involve people who are all different.

Tamil Nadu tourism destinations and their infrastructure have all the unique qualities for serving as tourism service products. They have all the characteristics of service marketing. Tamil Nadu has an ancient civilization. It is located in the southernmost part of the country. It has a long coast line of more than 1000 kms abutting the Bay of Bengal and Indian Ocean. The state is endowed with a multiplicity of cultures and regional variation in climate and in the flora and the fauna.

It encompasses hills, dales, beaches, backwaters, mangrove forests, dry farm land, rivers, lakes, tanks and an irrigated delta. Its history and ancient culture is revealed in the many monuments dotting the length and breadth of the state with its temples and forts. Wildlife and bird sanctuaries, tribal habitations, hill resort and a wealth of talent among its people in terms of dance, music and the arts is an important feature.

Tamil Nadu is also a modern state with infrastructure facilities for trade, industry, commerce and highly skilled and educated population. It is the policy of the State Government to promote the state as a tourism destination for the people of the country and the world under the branding "Enchanting Tamil Nadu".

Tourism Market Segmentation

A segment is discrete, identifiable, viable and appropriate. It is distinguished by characteristics of purpose, needs, motivation, benefits and behaviour. The segmentation is usually done on the following basis of one or more of the following characteristics:

Geographic - like region, district, density of population, climate, urban- rural etcetera.

Demographic - like family size, religion, sex, income, occupation, language, education etcetera.

67 Psychographic - like value system, life styles, and personality types.

Buying Behaviour - like volumes, frequency, delivery requirements, and negotiated contracts.

The tourism market may be segmented on the basis of place of origin, tourists, destinations, purpose of tourism like holiday, pilgrimage, sightseeing, shopping etcetera. It may be categorised on the basis of economic status and spending tendencies, demographic characteristics like age, sex and occupation. It may also be segmented on the basis of preference for staying like camping, luxury hotels etcetera and on the basis of preference for travel through air, sea, road or rail.

The policy note for 2012-13 listed "adventure tourism, niche tourism, cruise tourism, eco- tourism, MICE tourism, sea tourism as a new segment. Even more realistic ideas relating to eco- tourism and adventure tourism are taken into consideration.

Tourism Market Research

Tourism market research is the process of systematically gathering, analysing and evaluating data relating to the market. It is constantly carried out by market analysis, customer research, products and price study, promotion and sales research.

Tamil Nadu tourism department has given importance to continuous research and planning to evolve new tourism products/circuits/destinations. This will be done in-house or will be out sourced by hiring experts. The new products will be given adequate publicity. To keep the interest of the tourist alive the product will be remodelled at least once every three years. So as to keep records for posterity and to retain the interest of the discerning tourist, history, travel writers and researchers working on tourism will be encouraged to observe, research and write about locations, culture, festivals etcetera of the state. The state will encourage publication of such literature. Through the tourism marketing research, Tamil Nadu Tourism Department found following circuits for development in the policy note of 2012-2013.

The following two priority circuits have been selected for strengthening tourist infrastructure:

East Coast Circuit- Pilgrimage and heritage circuit covering Kancheepuram, Cuddalore, Villupuram, Tiruvannamalai, Nagapattinam, Tiruvarur, Thanjavur, Pudukkottai and Tiruchirappalli districts. Tirukkovilur will also be added.

68 Southern Circuit- Pilgrimage and eco-circuit covering Madurai, Theni, Dindigul, Ramanathapuram, Sivagangai, Virudhunagar, Tirunelveli, Thoothukudi, Kanyakumari districts and Western Ghats area. Ooty has also been added. The East-Coast Circuit will be taken up first along with Western Ghats followed by the Southern Circuit.

Marketing Mix for Tourism

The marketing mix for any service industry is discussed as 8Ps.They are: 1. Product Elements 2. Process 3. Place and Time 4. Productivity and Quality 5. Promotion and Education 6. People 7. Price and other user costs 8. Physical Evidence

Let Us Look at the 8 Ps in Detail. 1. Product

Product in tourism is basically the experience and hospitality provided by the service provided. In general, the experience has to be expressed in such a way that the tourists see a value in them. 2. Process

The process in Tourism include: (a) trip planning and anticipation, (b) travel to the site/area, (c) recollection and (d) trip planning packages The trip planning packages include: maps, attractions and onsite information regarding lodging, food, quality souvenirs or mementoes. 3. Place and Time -Location and Accessibility

The place and time in tourism is providing directions and maps, providing estimates of travel time and distances from different market areas, recommending direct and scenic travel routes, identifying attractions and support facilities along

69 different travel routes and informing potential customers of alternative travel methods to the area such as airlines and railroads. 4. Productivity and Quality

This is similar to other service industries. The quality is assessed by time taken for a service, the promptness of the service, reliability and so on. 5. Promotion and Education

Like other services, the promotion should address, the accurate and timely information helping to decide whether to visit target audience, the image to be created for the organization, objectives budget, timing of campaign, media to be selected and evaluation methods. 6. People

People are the centres for tourism. It is more a human intensive sector. For hospitality and guest relations it is very important to focus on the people. It also plays a vital role in quality control, personal selling and employee morale. 7. Price and Other User Costs

The price of the tourism services depend on business and target market objectives, cost of producing, delivering and promoting the product, willingness of the target, prices charged by competitors offering similar product/service to the same target markets, availability and prices of substitute products/services and the economic climate. 8. Physical Evidence

In tourism the physical evidence basically depends on travel experience, stay, and comfort. Here, the core product is bed in the case of stay.

According to the Tourism Marketing Mix following statistics denotes the marketability of Tamil Nadu as a unique tourism service product.

Tamil Nadu is the 7th most populous state in India with a population of 72.1 million (Census 2011), representing 5.96% of India's population. As per the Annual Survey of Industries (ASI) FY12, Tamil Nadu is the leading state in terms of employment generation, with 15.95 lakh persons employed and 36,996 number of factories in the registered manufacturing sector.

70 With a literacy rate of 80.3% Tamil Nadu ranks 8th among the Indian states. The state is amongst the extensively urbanized states in the country with 48.5% of the population living in urban areas. Tamil Nadu is one of the most industrialized states in India. As of March 2014 outstanding investment projects in Tamil Nadu stood at `9.61 trillion.

During FY06 and FY07, the economy of Tamil Nadu had recorded strong growth rates of 14.0% and 15.2%, respectively. During the Eleventh Plan Period (FY08-FY12) although the expenditure exceeded the approved outlay, growth slowed down in critical sectors such as power, industry and agriculture, thereby bringing down the state economy's annual growth rate to an average of 8.6% during this five-year period.

71 Social Infrastructure in Tamil Nadu Education Tamil Nadu is one of the most progressive states in India. The literacy rate in the state stands at 80.3% which is the 8th highest among the Indian states. Tamil Nadu has a good educational infrastructure with over 55,000 primary, middle, high and higher secondary schools.

Vocational education was introduced in higher secondary schools during the 10th Five Year Plan period. The state government has set a target of raising the Gross Enrollment Ratio (GER) in higher education to 25% by 2020 from the present level of 11.73%. For the 12th Plan, secondary and vocational education has received the highest plan outlay in the educational sector. Table-1 Educational Infrastructure in Tamil Nadu: 2013

Category Number Schools* 55,667 Arts & Science colleges 1,328 Engineering colleges 553 Polytechnic colleges 464 Govt. medical institutions 47

Note: *Primary, middle, high & higher secondary Source: Various govt. documents

Table -2: 12th Five year Plan Outlay in Education

Category Outlay Elementary Education 55.17 Secondary and Vocational Education 66.75 Higher Education 36.59 Technical and Professional Ecucation 20.30 Sports and Youth Welfare 13.4 Tamil Development 2.11 Science and Technology 1.77

72 Healthcare

Tamil Nadu is well equipped with healthcare facilities. Chennai, the state capital, is popularly known as the healthcare capital of India while Tamil Nadu is increasingly being recognized as the medical hub in South Asia. During the Eleventh Plan, an outlay of 27.30 billion was allocated for the health sector and the expenditure incurred was 47.19 billion. The proposed outlay for health and family welfare for the Twelfth Five Year Plan is 108.32 billion out of which nearly 82% is for healthcare delivery and services. Table -3: Tamil Nadu: 12th Plan Outlay on Health & Family Welfare

Category Proposed Outlay Healthcare Delivery and Services 88.71 Medical Education and Research 18.55 Indian Medicine and Homoeopathy 1.05

Source: Tamil Nadu 12th Plan Document

Apart from this, two midi-cities will be created in southern and western Tamil Nadu with an aim to serve the medical tourism industry by investment in hospital and educational facilities, logistics and hospitality services.

With a view to enhance the industrial development of the southern districts of Tamil Nadu namely Madurai, Dindigul, Theni, Sivagangai, Ramanathapuram, Virudhunagar, Pudukkottai, Thoothukudi, Tirunelveli and Kanniyakumari, the state government plans to implement the Madurai-Thoothukudi Industrial Corridor. The state government has already permitted SIPCOT to establish new industrial parks in these districts.

Tamil Nadu is one of the most favoured investment destinations due to its supply of skilled manpower, adequate availability of physical and social infrastructure and the proactive policies of the state government. During FY13, 17 Memoranda of Understanding (MoU) were signed with domestic and foreign investors for an investment totalling 266.25 billion which will generate direct and indirect employment for over 1.45 lakh persons.

73 Infrastructural Status in Tamil Nadu Tamil Nadu has a well-developed system of roads, railways, ports, power and communication. All the villages and towns in the state are electrified. Chennai, Tiruchirapalli, Madurai, Coimbatore and Thoothukudi have domestic airports while Chennai also has an international airport.

Ports and Highways Tamil Nadu has a coast line of about 1,076 km within which there are three major ports, namely Ennore, Chennai and Tuticorin notified under the Major Port Trust Act, 1963 and 23 non-major (minor) ports notified under the Indian Ports Act, 1908.

The National Highways roads in Tamil Nadu traverse a total length of 4974 km out of which 1,500 km are being maintained by the State National Highways wing and the remaining 3,474 km by the National Highways Authority of India (NHAI). Table -4: Road Network in Tamil Nadu

Category Lengh (km) National Highways 4,974 State Highways 10,764 Major District Roads 11,247 Other District Roads 35,032 Total 62,017 Source: Highways and Minor Ports Department Policy Note 2013-14, Tamil Nadu

Launching of New Tours The following new tours were launched by TTDC on the World Tourism Day i.e. 27th September2012: 1. Nagarathar Temple Tour 2. Thirukkadaiyur Temple Tour 3. Tiruchirapalli Temple Tour 4. Freedom Fighters Circuit Tour

74 It is sure to attract a large number of tourists and to reach out to them the Department of Tourism has launched the following initiatives:-

 Brand Promotion  Discover Tamil Nadu Campaign  Long Term Brand Building and Promotion  Publicize the state as an all season destination.  To project that Tamil Nadu is not only the land of temples but also a state endowed with many tourist attractions to enhance equality and comprehensive visitor experience.  Art, craft and cuisine of the state to be given eminence.

Positive Impacts

By fulfilling important segmentations of Service Tourism Marketing, Tamil Nadu received the highest number of domestic tourists during 2014, according to Ministry of Tourism. Tamil Nadu received 32.76 crore domestic tourists in 2014 followed by Uttar Pradesh which received 18.28 crore domestic tourists during the same period says the data compiled by the market research division of Ministry of Tourism. Tamil Nadu was ranked second in India in the domestic tourist arrivals next to Andhra Pradesh and also second in foreign tourist arrivals next to Maharashtra in 2012. In 2013, Tamil Nadu stands first in India in domestic tourist arrivals for the first time and a close second in foreign tourist arrivals. Tamil Nadu has in recent times become one of the leading destinations for Medical Tourism and Wellness Tourism.

Negative Impacts

The policy note for 2012-13 listed "adventure tourism, niche tourism, cruise tourism, eco- tourism and sea tourism as a new segment. Even more realistic ideas relating to eco-tourism and adventure tourism have taken off. TTDC's profits have declined from 16.3% in 2012-13 to 11.9% in 2013-14 though there is a marginal increase in turn over which officials say was mainly from income tax exemptions and sale in restaurants and bars in its hotels. The room occupancy has declined.

75 Conclusion

Tamil Nadu Tourism Department as a service tourism product was not successful for the year 2014-2015 due to the improper marketing approaches towards both domestic and foreign tourists. Promotion has not gone beyond the temple tourism and the government is yet to include the private sector. In contrast, Tamil Nadu tourism's marketing initiatives are limited to advertisements about tourism development corporation hotels and tours in Google and messages in mobile phones and Facebook as per plans of 2014-15set out in the state legislature. Brand promotion includes a plan to rope in brand ambassadors but the government has not fixed a deadline for the imitative.

Experts say the government should brand the state, allow the private entrepreneurs to invest and create an environment sensitive to the needs of the tourists who visit Tamil Nadu are at a loss of connectivity and clear information.

References 1. Ayyappan, V. (2014, August 7). Tamil Nadu Tourism still treads the Temple Trail. Times of India.

2. Bhatia, A.K. (1991). International Tourism: Fundamentals and Practices. New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

3. Choudhary, Vikas. (2010). International Tourism & Sustainable Development. New Delhi: Centrum Press.

4. Dun & Bradstreet's Research Report "India 2020 Economy Outlook".

5. (2010, July, 5). More Foreign Tourist Fly to Tamil Nadu for Culture, Health Care. Times of India.

6. Ministry of Tourism, GOI Annual Statistical Handbook (2014-2015).

7. Sharma, Lalita. (2011). Introduction to Travel and Tourism. New Delhi: Centrum Press.

8. (2014, July 5).Tamil Nadu Most Popular Destination for Domestic Tourists. Times of India.

9. Tirtha, Ranjit. (2002). Geography of India (IInd Edition). Jaipur: Rawat Publications.

76 Michael Addition of Chalcones with Ethylacetoacetate Using Grinding Method D. Visagaperumal1

Abstract

A series of 3-substituted phenyl-5-substituted phenyl pentanoate (MA1-MA8) were synthesized by using Michael addition reaction. In this reaction, substituted chalcones were made to react with ethyl acetoacetate by grinding method. The chalcones were prepared by treating acetophenone with different substituted benzaldehyde in the presence of sodium hydroxide and ethanol. The synthesized compounds were then screened for antimicrobial activity. Antibacterial activity were screened on Bacillus subtilis and Eschericia coli while antifungal activity was screened on Aspergillus niger and Aspergillus flavus. The structure of the synthesized compounds was characterized by using IR, 1H NMR and mass spectral data. The results for antimicrobial activity evaluation of the synthesized molecules showed weak antibacterial and moderate antifungal activities except MA4 when compared the standard drugs (ciprofloxacin for antibacterial activity; ketoconazole for antifungal activity). From the data obtained it was found that 2-hydroxy derivative showed most potent compound that seems to be responsible for both antibacterial and antifungal activity. Thus compound MA4 having 2-hydroxy can be chosen as a lead molecule to synthesise novel compounds for antibacterial and antifungal activity.

Keywords: Michael addition, Chalcones, Antibacterial Activity, Antifungal Activity

1. Associate Professor, Department of Pharmaceutical Chemistry, T. John College of Pharmacy.

77 1. Introduction: Though there are a number of antimicrobial agents available the main matter of concern in treating microbial infections is because of the limited number of efficacious antimicrobial drugs. A lot of currently available drugs are toxic, enables recurrence because they are bacteriostatic/fungistatic and were not bactericidal/fungicidal, while many lead to the development of resistance because of prolonged periods of administration. This impact is more acute in developing countries as the desired medicines are not available (Tomar et al., 2007; Sharma et al., 2009). So always there is a real perceived need for the discovery of new compounds that are endowed with antibacterial and antifungal activities possibly acting through certain mechanism of actions. They should be distinct from those of well known classes of antimicrobial agents to which many clinically similar pathogens are resistant now (Sharma et al., 2009; Tuncbilek et al., 2009; Sharma et al., 2009).

In view of these findings, it is observed that the Michael addition products had done on antimicrobial activities (Yu ting Liu et al., 2015; El Hashash MA et al., 2014). This finding had led to synthesize new 3-substituted phenyl-5-substituted phenyl pentanoate with chalcones by using Michael addition reaction and to screen their antimicrobial activity against different selected bacterial strains.

2. Results and Discussion 2.1 Chemistry In this research, a series of novel Michael addition product was synthesized by substituting different substituted phenyl moiety at 3rd and 5th position of pentaonate. The synthesis was started by using substituted acetophenone and substituted benzaldehyde. The chalcone was synthesized when the two reactants have reacted from which the title compound was synthesized by grinding the chalcone with ethyl acetoacetate and sodium carbonate as depicted in scheme. The physicochemical properties of the newly synthesized compounds were shown in table 1.

Compd Molecular Molecular Melting R R %Yield R Code 1 Formula Weight point (˚C) f

MD1 H 4-N(CH3)2 C23H27NO4 381.46 72.2 96 0.54

MD2 H 3-NO2 C21H21NO6 383.9 76.4 77 0.72

MD3 H O-CH3 C22H24O5 368.42 55.6 91 0.91

MD4 H 2-OH C21H22O5 354.39 62.2 87 0.64

78 MD5 4-Br 4-N(CH3)2 C22H26BrNO4 460.38 44.6 104 0.59

MD6 4-Br 3-NO2 C21H20BrNO6 462.29 86.9 102 0.83

MD7 4-Br O-CH3 C22H23BrO5 447.31 32.6 102 0.78

MD8 4-Br 2-OH C21H21BrO5 433.29 28.9 122 0.68

The synthesized compounds were characterized by using IR, 1H NMR and mass spectra. The spectral data obtained for the synthesized compounds showed their respective peaks indicating their formation in their synthesis. Formation of the final compound (MA1-MA8) was confirmed by the absence of a weak alkenic C=C bands at 1680-1620 cm-1 with IR spectra. The presence of a peak at 2946-2904 cm-1 confirms the presence of aliphatic C-H stretching. A triplet was appeared at around 3.59 ppm which confirms the formation of CH-CH2 in NMR spectra. A doublet was observed at around 4.14 ppm that correspond to CH2-CH. The presence of multiplet at 6.73-7.76 ppm shows the presence of aromatic protons in the nuclear magnetic resonance. The appearance of their respective molecular peaks in the mass spectroscopy confirms the formation. 2.2 Biological Activity

All the synthesized compounds were evaluated for their in vitro antimicrobial activity by bore well method. The activities were compared by using Ciprofloxacin (100 μg/ml) and Ketoconazole (100 μg/ml) as standard for antibacterial and antifungal activity, respectively and chloroform as solvent. The results of antimicrobial activity are summarized in table 2 and 3. From the results, it was found that inhibition was observed with many synthesized compounds when screened for antifungal activity than antibacterial activity.

In general, it was observed that unsubstituted derivatives exhibited better activity than the corresponding bromo substituted analog. Among all the synthesized compounds, compound MA 4 had shown better activity against Bacillus subtilis, Aspergillus niger and Aspergillus flavus (100 µg/ml). The exhibited activity was equipotent to that of the standard drug which may be due to the presence of electron donating group. Compounds MA3 and MA4 had exhibited moderate antifungal activity as compared to the standard drug against Aspergillus niger. All the other synthesized compounds had shown lower antifungal activity and no antibacterial activity.

Within the unsubstituted analog at C-5 phenyl derivative, compound MA4 with hydroxyl derivative showed significant antifungal activity as compared to standard drug ketoconazole. When the hydroxyl group was replaced with methoxy and

79 dimethylamino group decrease in activity was observed. While replacing hydroxyl group with nitro group, a reasonable decrease in activity was observed (MA2 and MA6). Addition of electron withdrawing group like bromo has reduced the activity. The sequence of the functional group that was present on the phenyl group at the C-3 phenyl that exhibited the activity was in the following order: hydroxyl>methoxy> dimethylamino>nitro.

Thus, from the synthesized compounds, ethyl 2-acetyl-3-(2-hydroxyphenyl)-5- oxo-5-phenylpentanoate, MA4 was found to be most active antifungal agent and had equipotent activity as like that of standards. Table 2: Antimicrobial Activity Diameter of Zone of Inhibition in mm Antibacterial Activity Antifungal Activity Compound Bacillus Escherichia Aspergillus Aspergillus Name subtilis coli niger flavus NCIM 2118 NCIM 2063 NCIM 596 NCIM 539 PFG 1 - - ++ ++ PFG 2 - - + - PFG 3 - - ++ ++ PFG 4 +++ - +++ ++ PFG 5 - - ++ + PFG 6 - - + - PFG 7 - - ++ - PFG 8 - - ++ + Ciprofloxacin +++ +++ +++ +++ 10µg/ml

(-) -no zone of inhibition; 15-25mm -+; 26-35 mm - ++; 36-45 mm - +++

3. Experimental 3.1 Material and Measurements

The chemicals used were reagent grade and as received with further purification. All melting points were determined in open capillaries and are uncorrected. IR absorption spectra were recorded on Perkin Elmer-838 FT IR spectrometer using KBr pellets and PMR spectra were recorded in DMSO-d6 on Bruker DRX-300

80 (300 MHz FT NMR) instrument (chemical shifts in δ ppm). Mass spectra were obtained on Agilent 1100 series LCMS. The purity of the compounds was routinely checked by TLC using silica gel and cyclohexane:ethyl acetate (7:3, v/v) as the mobile phase. The target compounds were synthesized as outlined in Schemes 1. 3.2 Procedure for the Synthesis 3.2.1 Synthesis of 3-phenyl substituted-1-phenyl substituted- 2-en-1-one (1)

Equimolar quantities of Anisaldehyde (1.2 ml) / 3-nitrobenzaldehyde (1.511 g) / p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde (1.49 g) / salicylaldehyde (1.0 ml) (0.01 mol) and acetophenone (1.2 ml) (0.01 mol) were dissolved in minimum amount of alcohol. Sodium hydroxide solution (0.79 g) (0.02 mol) was added slowly and the mixture was stirred for 2 h until the entire mixture becomes very clouded. Then the mixture was poured slowly into 400 ml of water with constant stirring and kept in refrigerator for 24 h. The precipitate obtained was filtered, washed and recrystallized from ethanol. 3.2.2 Synthesis of 3-substituted phenyl-5-substituted phenyl pentanoate (MA1- MA8)

A mixture of 3-phenyl substituted-1-phenyl substituted-2-en-1-one derivative

(10 mmol), sodium carbonate (4.23 g) (40 mmol) and ethyl acetoacetate (1.95 ml) (15 mmol) were ground together for 20-30 min in a mortor with a pestle at RT. The progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC. After completion of the reaction, the product was poured into ice-cold water. The separated product was filtered, washed with water till neutral, to yield a colourless product. It was recrystallized from a suitable solvent. 3.2.2.1 Ethyl-2-acetyl-3-(4-dimethylaminophenyl)-5-oxo-5- phenyl pentanoate (MA1):

-1 IR (ν, cm ): 3019 (CH), 2947 (CH3 CH), 1678 (C=O), 1528, 1428 (C=C), 1 1264 (C-N), 1233 (C-O). H NMR: δ: 1.35 (s, 6H, N(CH3)2), 1.7 (s, 3H, CH3),

3.9 (1H, CH), 4.08 (s, 3H, CH3CO), 4.34 (t, 2H, CH3CH2CO), 4.59 (t, 3H,

CH2CO), 4.96 (s, 1H, CH), 6.695-7.751 (m, 9H, ArH). MS m/z (rel. int.): 381 (M+).

81 3.2.2.2 Ethyl-2-acetyl-3-(3-nitrophenyl)-5-oxo-5-phenyl pentanoate (MA2):

-1 IR (ν, cm ): 3059 (CH), 2948 (CH3 CH), 1745 (C=O), 1599, 1458 (C=C), 1 1163 (C-N), 1230 (C-O), 1163 (C-N). H NMR: δ: 1.35 (s, 3H, CH3), 3.59 (1H,

CH), 3.96 (s, 3H, CH3CO), 4.41 (t, 2H, CH3CH2CO), 4.45 (t, 3H, CH2CO), 4.79 (s, 1H, CH), 6.731-6.765 (m, 9H, ArH). MS m/z (rel. int.): 383 (M+). 1.3 In vitro Antimicrobial Activity

All the synthesized compounds were tested in vitro for their antibacterial activity against Bacillus subtilis NCIM 2063 (Gram + ve) and Escherichia coli NCIM 2118 (Gram – ve) bacteria and antifungal activity against Aspergillus niger NCIM 596 and Aspergillus flavus NCIM 539. Ciprofloxacin and Ketoconazole was used as a standard drug for antibacterial and antifungal activity, respectively and DMF as a control solvent. The primary after 24 h of incubation at 37 °C for antibacterial activity and 48 h of incubation at 25 °C for antifungal activity, the zone of inhibition was measured in mm. The primary screen was carried out using the agar disc-diffusion method () using Muller–Hinton agar medium. Sterile filter paper discs were moistened with the synthesized compound solution in dimethylformamide of specific concentration of 100 µg/disc were carefully placed on the agar cultures plates that had been previously innoculated separately with the microorganisms. The results of the preliminary antimicrobial testing of the synthesized compounds are shown in Table 2. The results revealed that majority of the synthesized compounds showed varying degrees of inhibition against the screened microorganisms. In general, the inhibitory activity against the tested antifungal activity was higher than that of the antibacterial activity as only one compound has shown antibacterial activity derivatives.

82 MD 1- MD 8

R1= 4-N(CH3)2, 3-NO2, 3-OCH3, 2-OH. R = H, 4-Br References

1. El Hashash M. A., Essawy A., & Fawzy A. S. (2014). Synthesis and antimicrobial activity of some novel heterocyclic candidates via Michael addition involving 4-(4-acetamidophenyl)-4-oxobut-2-enoic acid. Advances in chemistry, 2014. Article ID. 619749.

2. Sharma D., Narasimhan B., Kumar P., & Jalbout, A. (2009). Synthesis and QSAR evaluation of (2-(substituted phenyl)-1H-benzimidazol-1-yl)-pyridin- 3-yl-methanones. Eur. J. Med. Chem. 2009; 44: 1119-1127.

3. Sharma, D., Narasimhan, B., Kumar, P., Judge, V., Narang, R., De Clercq, E., & Balzarni, J. (2009). Synthesis, antimicrobial and antiviral evaluation of substituted imidazole derivatives. Eur. J. Med. Chem. 44 (6): 2347-2353.

4. Sharma, S., Gangal, S., & Rauf, A. (2009). Convenient one-potent synthesis of 2-substituted benzimidazoles, tetrahydrobenzimidazoles and imidazoles and evaluation of their in-vitro antibacterial and antifungal activities. Eur. J. Med. Chem. 2009; 44: 1751-1757.

5. Silverstein, R. M. and Webster, F. X. (1998). Spectrometric Identification of Organic compounds. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.

6. Tomar, V., Bhattacharjee, G., Kamaluddin, & Kumar, A. (2007). Synthesis and antimicrobial evaluation of new chalcones containing piperazine or 2,5-dichlorothiophene moiety. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 17: 5321-5324.

7. Tuncbilek, M., Kiper, T., Altanlar, N. (2009). Synthesis and in-vitro antimicrobial activity of some novel substituted benzimidazole derivatives having potent activity against MRSA. Eur. J. Med. Chem. 44: 1024-1033.

8. Villanova, P. A. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) (1985) Approved standard document M-7A.

9. Yuting, Liu, Hanli, Zhang, Dawei, Yin, & Dan, Chen. (2015). Synthesis, characterization and antimicrobial activity of novel heterocyclic compounds containing a ferrocene unit via Michael addition reaction. Res Chem Intermed 41: 3793-3801.

83 The Politics of Gender and Social Constraint: Decoding the Challenges to Gender Equality Shilpa S.P. Singh1

Abstract

The gender, society and politics are interlinked to each other, the gender is essentially a reflection of society and state is synonymous with politics, many people relate gender and politics merely as the representation of women in politics but gender as a social issue also has political repercussions as it hinders balanced development of state and poses many other challenges.Theoretically speaking, though state derives its power from the society or established social norms. It is a separate organisation of power as it legitimises the power forms in the society. Thus, disorder and injustice in the society must be rectified by the state. Hence, gender disparities which are the outcome of social construction should be eliminated by the efforts of the state. But in India, the deep rooted traditions are socially so strong that they violate the ideal of the state and still women are under the bondage of the social institutions and the norms they are experiencing or witnessing backwardness in the forms of illiteracy, domestic violence, undesirable, socio-economic dependence on men and poor health status. These are issues which are very politically sensitive as it not only takes heavy toll on overall progress and development in India but also because it challenges the constitution as well as law and order situation. Further, being a human rights issue it brings embarrassment to India at any global forum and becomes a question of national image. Gender inequality is first a social issue and then a political; it is political only

1. Assisant Professor, Goa University

84 because it has social ramifications. Today capability of women in defying gender stereotypes is not in question, thus, we witness some mobility in gender stereotypes but it is concentrated only at larger public and professional spheres as these do not present serious challenge to patriarchal system and mindset which continues to have strong hold on private sphere, that is, familial structure. The system of needs has led patriarchy to shift a little from previous controls, however it compensates for it in private sphere. For instance, a working woman who brings income in home but still is dependent and controlled by men poses no challenge to patriarchy in real sense. The affirmative action can surely bring backward women upward in economic and political status but to achieve gender equality in comprehensive sense, the patriarchy and privilege has to give way to equality at personal, familial and social level which can be achieved only through major transformation in both social ideas and institutions.

Keywords: Gender, Social Constraint, Social Equality.

Comprehending Gender and Its Implications

The word “gender” is very often understood and used interchangeably with the word “sex”, basically to indicate anatomical distinction between male and female. The synonymous usage of these terms is not correct either in technical linguistic form or in sociological usage. The gender is essentially much more sensitive than mere biological difference. The American Feminists are credited for being the first one to use gender in terms of cultural and social connotations as they used gender to denote cultural construction– the entire social creation of ideas about the appropriate roles of men and women.1 In simpler terms, gender refers to the social construction of the two sexes that result in creation of stereo types. The gender stereotypes are based on broader construction of masculinity as suitable for public and political sphere and femininity associated with private and domestic sphere. Most often these stereotypes are seen as qualities that men and women are desired to have which in turn shapes the institutional and familial structure in the society. For instance, women are constructed to be emotionally weak and caring, therefore, suitable for nursing and housekeeping. On the other hand, men are constructed to be mentally tough and courageous, thus, suitable for defence and politics. This conception is problematic as gender based stereotyping usually prevents members of either sex from undertaking activities that do not match with the construct of masculinity and feminity.2 It must be noted here that, historically, gender stereotypes have social and religious sanction upon them.

85 Hence, society as well as religion endorses the roles in conformity with gender stereotypes and usually restrict the mobility in gender specific roles which defy the equal status of both sexes. Thus, the term gender is also an indicator of unequal relationship between men and women where women are regarded as inferior and subordinate to men which results in their subjugation and discrimination at each phase of her life.3 Power is prerequisite of social status and vice-versa the gender issue has very sensitive political overtones. The whole concept of gender justice revolves around equality of status to women in all the spheres of life. Almost in all civilisations of the world the women have been subjected to seclusion, suppression and servitude and our very own India is no exception. According to deep rooted Indian traditions which reflected in our social, political, religious and cultural institutions, the women are expected to be subordinate to men and their subjugation has been sanctified by these institutions. However, since the Raj period the Indian civilisation has witnessed an advancement with subsequent emergence of India as a modern state not only in gender equality which is enshrined in our constitution but also affirmative action in the form of positive discrimination and special provision for women under article 15(3) of Indian Constitution which has been provided for achieving gender justice.4 These policy measures however has not proved enough to weed out deep rooted Indian orthodoxy and traditions which continue to be major impediment in improving status of women as well as in providing appropriate representation and opportunities in social, economic and political sphere. From this aspect we first need to take a look at deep-rooted Indian tradition which undermines the status of women in India.

Gender in Indian traditions: Past Reflections on Present

In India, women constitute half of the total population but still they are backward and vulnerable to exploitation, violence and torture; their vulnerability can be traced to deep rooted Indian traditions and beliefs that continue to dominate our lives till today. Women in Indian traditions are subjected to bondage, as a girl, wife and mother; she was under the tutelage of a father, a husband and a son. Her freedom was also circumscribed which becomes evident from the declaration of historical philosopher Manu that “By a girl, a young woman, or even Aged one, nothing must be done independently even in her own house.” 5 Thus, women’s productivity within the household and outside was subjected to control by men. The linguistic term like Swami, Pati and Malik that were used to denote husbands actually meant masters whereas the rituals like sati, purdah and polygamy were the outcomes of such subjectivity. These limited women as

86 mere objects to be used by men, men were the principle people to earn and govern, women were there only to supplement his work, she was desired to have a domestic role and no other role. Hence, power which comes from economic and political status was confined only to men and they remained powerful for centuries and women remained weak. Ironically, even in the era of globalisation, the patriarchal mindset of our society has not changed, the family’s name is still continued through men only, they are also the primary inheritors of parental property and the natural guardian of children. Other factors related to marriage like dowry and patrilocality, more precisely rituals like “kanya-daan” in which parents of daughter take pride in disposing her off forever as “daan” to a son- owning family, significantly gift, i.e., “daan” cannot be taken and returned and hence, after marriage, whether her in–laws are treating her well or badly is seen as her destiny. This can be regarded as the most severe example of commoditization of women much more than most debated western commoditization of women through beauty pageants, it is paradoxical that even women activists are not ready to challenge these rituals which are sacrosanct and unchanged even today. These are socio-cultural factors which constrain women more so in rural and semi-urban areas, besides reinforcing a negative self-image among women which finally restricts their emancipation and development.

Gender, Society and Politics

The gender, society and politics are interlinked to each other. The gender is essentially a reflection of society and state is synonymous to politics, many people relate gender and politics merely as representation of women in politics but gender as a social issue also has political repercussions as it hinders balanced development of state and poses many other challenges. Theoretically speaking, though state derives its power from society or established social norms, it is a separate organisation of power as it legitimises the power forms in society, thus, disorder and injustice in society must be rectified by state, hence, gender disparities which are outcomes of social construction should be eliminated by efforts of the state. But in India, the deep rooted traditions are socially so strong that they violate the ideals of the state. Thus, often society’s notion of rights, duties, behavioural norms and the identity of gender are antithetical to those of state.6 Hence, even though the principles of gender equality are enshrined in the Indian Constitution, in its preamble, fundamental rights, duties and directive principles, India has also ratified convention on eliminations of all forms of discrimination against women in 1993 itself which binds India to prevent gender based discrimination and to effectuate right to life including empowerment of economic, social and cultural rights. But still women are under bondage of social institutions and norms. They are witnessing backwardness in forms of

87 illiteracy, domestic violence, undesirability and poor health status. These are issues which are very politically sensitive as it not only takes heavy toll on the overall development in India, for instance, the low ranking of India in Human Development Index is attributed to poor status of Indian women. It also challenges the constitution as well as the law and order situation. Further, being a human rights issue it brings embarrassment to India at the global forum and becomes a question of national image. These markers of status of women are discussed in detail below; let us examine the social constraints and states efforts in removing gender disparities in India.

Illiteracy

The importance of education for emancipation of women in undeniable, however, India still has one of the lowest female literacy rates in Asia. Today there are more than 200 million illiterate women in India. Not surprisingly India also has the largest population of non- school going girls, though the Indian Constitution guarantees free primary school education for children from the age of 6 to 14 years.7 There are certain factors which act as an impediment to the education of girl child. Firstly, for Indian parents investing in the education of the girl child is like throwing bundles of rupees into the well as it is perceived as something that has no return After marriage she steps into her in-laws’ house and her income if any, is confined to her in-laws house only. Thus, parents prefer saving money for dowry-price rather than doubling their expenditure by sending their daughters for higher education and the marriage of girls takes precedence over her education. It is indeed heartening that government has expressed strong commitment towards education of the girl child, ‘SarvaShikshaAbhiyan’, the flagship programme for universalisation of elementary education has special focus on disadvantaged group including girl child. The educational institute such as JawaharNavodayaVidyalaya andPratibhaVikasVidyalaya Schemes in every district of the country with fair reputation of a girl-child will contribute in the education of the child. In addition over the years, the mid-day meal scheme has also improved girls enrolment and retention in primary school in rural India. The upcoming scheme such as Kasturba Gandhi BalikaVidyalayawhich addresses the issue of gender disparities in rural area and among the disadvantaged communities by establishing residential school for girl child in rural areas will be indeed a breakthrough in the education of a girl child.8 But still policy-measures and welfare schemes are just not enough to promote education among girls, attitudinal as well as social-changes are necessary to improve educational and consequent socio-economic status of women in India.

88 Domestic Violence Women because of existing social conditions and institutions such as patri-locality i.e. transfer into an alien home and atmosphere are vulnerable to torture and violence. 37% of Indian women (majority married) between the age 15 to 49 years are victims of physical violence and abuse by their husbands, in-laws and others. This fact came out in report by United Nation’s Population Fund and National Family Health Survey III (2007-08). The report also said that violence against women was putting a huge strain on nation’s social and legal services and led to heavy loss of productivity. One such incident of violence translates into women losing an average seven working days. The report also said violence kills and disables as many women between age 15 to 44 years as cancer it takes a toll on woman’s health which surpasses accidentsin traffic and malaria combined. The consequences of gender-based violence are devastating including life-long emotional distress, mental health issues and poor reproductive health.9 Although Indian government came with a remarkable Domestic Violence Act of 2005 keeping the spirit of Beijing declaration and programme of action which regarded domestic violence as human rights issue and serious deterrent to development. Figures suggest that it has not being able to prove very effective.10

Undesirability Leading to Female Infanticide The declining female ratio over the years is a concrete evidence of undesirability of female in India. At present its 940 girls for every 1000 boys. The national capital territory of Delhi has the lowest female sex ratio at 866. Haryana, the rapidly developing rich-rural state, is second in topping the chart of lowest female sex-ratio i.e. 877 females for every 1,000 males. In the agricultural heartland, that is, Punjab follows with 893 but other north and north-western states especially of Jat heartland are not far behind. Various reasons for undesirability of daughters in India are hypergamy, dowry, lack of economic support, kinship, marriage and patriarchal system.11 The principle cause however is patrilocalityas the daughter after marriage moves to husbands home and does not have share in her family’s immovable property, she is unable to either contribute to her natal family or offer old age support to her parents even though if she earns and hence Indians regard daughters as an “economic liability” and as “use-less”. Thus, Indian parents since centuries use female infanticide and foeticides as the means to get rid of the daughters. The practice of female infanticide is largely prevalent in north-India whereas in southern and western India the rates of these crimes are lower although the first preference is given to a male child only. It is ironical that in rural areas positive development like electricity and roads have not yet reached, however, negative development such as ‘Sonography Clinics’ can be even found in the remotest part of many Indian villages where surreptitiously

89 the sex-determination is conducted leading to female foeticide. According to a survey, in India more than 10 million female foetuses have been aborted in the last 2 years in both urban and rural areas.12 The desire for no daughters makes the task of levelling the imbalance of sex-ratio very demanding and challenging. The present situation reveals the failure of our strategies such as Pre-conception Pre-natal Diagnostic Technologies (PCPNDT) Misuse Act and “save the girl child” campaign. Poor Health Status Health is one of the indicators of development of asociety, the recent studies show that women are relatively less healthy than men, even though, they belong to the same class. Nutritional deficiency is more prevalent among illiterate rural women and women belonging to a low standard of living. The result of ill- health and unsanitary living conditions in motherhood leads to highest maternal mortality rate in the world. In rural India, some of the traditional practices are still continuing many women who deliver babies are subjected to isolation in unhealthy conditions, deprivation of proper nutritional food and other amenities due to false beliefs and superstitions. According to World Bank’s report on “Improving Women’s Health in India” iron-deficiency linked anaemia is widespread among girls and women affecting as high as 50-90% of pregnant women who mostly suffer from energy deficiency of the order of 1000 calories per day during pregnancy resulting in world’s highest rate of maternal mortality in India.13 For tackling these problems, National Rural Health Mission was launched in April 2005 as a flagship programme of UPA government where various programmes are being converged for Synergistic health-care in this country. Under NRHM every state is organizing village health and Nutrition Day (VHND) at every Anganwadi centre once in a month. Nutrition and health education of all women with special emphasis on pregnant and lactating mothers is also undertaken by the Anganwadi workers known as ASHA’s. These strategies are really aimed to achieve better health status of rural people especially women and it can bring positive results if properly implemented in future years.14

This symbolizes that despite the state’s special attention to gender issue nothing concrete has been achieved, the social constraints often down play the political will of achieving gender equality and empowerment.

Gender, Indian State and Affirmative Action

Many feminists argue that the policy-measures for development of women folk is not gender sensitive as it should be since policy making and the political sphere is dominated by men. It has often been argued that greater participation of

90 women in high politics is likely to influence policy outcomes in favour of women as will facilitate a greater transfer of power. In this regard, there was demand for affirmative action in 1980’s by women groups which was till then exclusively caste-based. In 1988, national perspective plan for women suggested that 30% reservation for women be introduced at all levels of elective bodies.15 The case for affirmative action for women gained impetus because of three prominent factors, firstly, the backwardness of women was hindering fast and balanced development of nation, secondly, to compensate for the historical wrong of the social institution that generated gender disparities and thirdly, the rise of assertion of gender equality by women groups and women movements which assumed political colour. In 1993, this led to amendment of constitution to provide reservation in village panchayat bodies to encourage grass root participation in politics. However, it did not improve the status of women in reaching the desired targets as discussed earlier. In 1995, there was again a huge uproar in Indian politics over the demand for reservation of seats in the parliament for women16 since then it has become a great and exhaustive debate which has been often politicized. The political parties like Samajwadi Party and RJD have aggravated the dilemmas of reservation by attaching it with the caste politics. The others problems off course must be mentioned; the permanent bench marking seats for women in 33% of the constituencies would mean that one-third of male incumbents wouldn’t be able to contest the next election from their present constituency, this move will meet with opposition from sitting MPs, it will also mean that real democracy wouldn’t be in place in one third of the country. The problem regarding suggestions for political parties nominating women for one third of their seats is that the political parties are usually calculative about seats they are likely to win easily and those they are unlikely to win.17 Political parties among whom the majority reflects sexist bias will most likely nominate women candidates for the seats they could lose. Eventually, this would mean more candidates but for the same nominal rate of representation of women in the parliament. Today the issue has become eye-candy which no political party affords to ignore. In 2009 general elections, Congress used women reservation and empowerment as major issue in its election campaign, BJP also did the same besides proposing ‘Ladli Lakshmi Scheme’. In the upcoming general election 2014, the issue of women security and empowerment is likely to be included in all the electoral manifestos of different political parties. It is indeed paradoxical that despite virtually desperate political will still no substantial moves have been made in the direction of its passage. However, Congress has advanced the “politics of symbolism”, thus, we are seeing first women speaker of Lok Sabha,Meira Kumar, and series of other elite class women who are empowered to continue the legacy of their family in the party. The most important point is that a greater or lesser representation of women in high politics is certainly not the best criterion

91 to enforce gender equality as the issue should be perceived within the structures of values and social norms that degrade the status of women. Affirmative action by government at secondary level would not facilitate women empowerment until social constraints at the basic level of their individual development are removed, i.e., in their families and the societies.

Conclusion

The gender disparities are still prevalent in India. Gender inequality is first a social issue and then a political and it is political only because it has social ramifications. Today capability of women in defying gender stereotypes is not in question, thus, we witness some mobility in gender stereotypes but it is concentrated only in the larger public and professional spheres as these do not present a serious challenge to the patriarchal system and the mindset which continues to have a strong hold over the private sphere i.e. familial structure. The system of needs has led patriarchy to shift a little from previous controls, however, it compensates for it in the private sphere. For instance, a working woman who brings income home but still is dependent and controlled by men poses no challenge to patriarchy in the real sense. The affirmative action can surely bring the backward women up in the economic and the political status but to achieve gender equality in comprehensive sense the patriarchy and the privilege has to give way to equality at a personal, familial and social level which can be achieved only through major transformation in both social ideas and institutions.

References 1. Sen, Simonti. “Gender and Politics” Political Sociology (New Delhi: Mc Millan India Ltd., 2005) 1st edition, PP.249-250.

2. South Asia Human Rights Documentation Centre “Gender Justice” Introducing Human Rights, (New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2006) 1st edition, P.156.

3. See Sen, P.251

4. Aggarwal, H.O. “Vulnerable groups and human rights” Human Rights (Allahabad: Central Law Publications, 2007) 10th edition, P.114.

5. Mahey, Sonia. “Status of Dalit women in India’s caste system”(University of Alberta:2000).

6. Bose, P.K. “State, Society and Politics” Political Sociology (New Delhi: Mc Millan India Ltd., 2005)1st edition, PP.28-29.

92 7. Sharma, Sheetal. “Empowering women through education: strategy for sustainable rural development” Kurukshetra (New Delhi), Vol. 56, No.3, January 2008, PP.3-5.

8. Ibid.

9. “Violence and the Indian Women” Mirror, Herald (Panjim, Goa), March 9, 2013, P.17.

10. See Aggarwal, H.O., P.119.

11. Birla, Rajshree. “More power to women” Times of India (Mumbai), June, 2007

12. Ibid.

13. Paliwal, Deepak, and Paliwal, Rajesh. “Drudgery among women in rural hilly areas”. Kurukshetra (New Delhi), Vol. 56, No.3, January 2008, P.25.

14. PIB, “Deficiency of iron among women” Kurukshetra(New Delhi), Vol.56, No.8, June 2012, P.48.

15. Sen., Simonti. P.262.

16. Online http://www.http://pmindia.nic.in/women reservation bill India.

93 The Personality Types of the Employees in Government and Private Sectors: A Study to Know the Personality Types of the Employees in Government and Private Sectors and the Reasons for Choosing the Government or Private Sectors Respectively Pavithra. R1

Abstract

The present study was conducted to know the personality types of the employees in government and private sectors and the reasons for choosing the government or private sectors respectively. The study was conducted on a sample of 129 employees of which 76 are from various government organizations and 53 are from various private organizations. They were administered with the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) to know their personality types and an open ended questionnaire to know the reasons for their choice in the respective sectors. The scores were tabulated for the government and private sector employees under the four personality types as measured by MBTI and a Mann-Whitney U test was done for the employees belonging to each type. The statistical analysis was done. It was seen that the government and private employees belonging to a particular personality type were not two independent groups [z scores were equal for both the set of employees and were not significant at 0.01 or 0.05 level of significance: Sensing=1.29; Intuitive=0.98; Thinking=0.16; Feeling=0.041]. The reasons given out by the employees for selecting the private and the government sector were similar across the different personality types but the frequency of the reason being stated differed for each of the personality types.

Keywords: Personality Types, Government, Private Employees.

1. Assistant Professor (Psychology), T. John College.

94 Introduction

Personality Types

Personality type refers to the psychological classification of different types of individuals. Personality types are sometimes distinguished from personality traits with the latter embodying a smaller grouping of behavioural tendencies. Types are sometimes said to involve qualitative differences between people whereas traits might be construed as quantitative differences. According to type theories, for example, introverts and extroverts are two fundamentally different categories of people. According to trait theories, introversion and extroversion are part of a continuous dimension, with many people in the middle.

Effective personality typologies reveal and increase knowledge and understanding of individuals, as opposed to diminishing knowledge and understanding as occurs in the case of stereotyping. Effective typologies also allow for increased ability to predict clinically relevant information about people and to develop effective treatment strategies.

Types vs. Traits

The term "type" has not been used consistently in Psychology and has become the source of some confusion. Furthermore, because personality test scores usually fall on a bell curve rather than in distinct categories, personality type theories have received considerable criticism among psychometric researchers. One study that directly compared a "type" instrument (the MBTI) to a "trait" instrument (the NEO PI) found that the trait measure was a better predictor of personality disorders. These problems have led to personality type theories that have fallen out of favour in Psychology. Many researchers now believe that it is impossible to explain the diversity of human personality with a small number of discrete types. They recommend trait models instead, such as the five factor model.

Type Theories • An early form of personality type theory was the ‘Four Temperaments System’ of Galen based on the four humours model of Hippocrates an extended ‘Five Temperaments System’ based on the classical theory was published in 1958.

• One example of personality types is Type A and Type B personality theory. According to this theory, impatient, achievement-oriented people are

95 classified as Type A, whereas easy-going, relaxed individuals are designated as Type B. The theory originally suggested that Type A individuals were more at risk for coronary heart disease but this claim has not been supported by empirical research.

• There has been a study to prove that people with Type A personalities are more likely to develop personality disorders whereas Type B personalities are more likely to become alcoholics.

• Developmental psychologist Jerome Kagan is a prominent contemporary advocate of type theory. He suggests that shy, withdrawn children are best viewed as having an inhibited temperament, which is qualitatively different from other children.

• As a matter of convenience, trait theorists sometimes use the term "type" to describe someone who scores exceptionally high or low on a particular personality trait. Hans Eysenck refers to super ordinate personality factors as types and more specific associated traits as traits.

• Several Pop Psychology theories (e.g., Men are from Mars, Women are from Venus, the enneagram) rely on the idea of distinctively different types of people.

Carl Jung

One of the more influential ideas originated in the theoretical work of Carl Jung as published in the book Psychological Types. The original German language edition, "Psychologische Typen", was first published by Rascher Verlag, Zurich in 1921. Typologies such as Socionics, the MBTI assessment, and the Keirsey Temperament Sorter have roots in Jungian philosophy.

Jung's interest in typology grew from his desire to reconcile the theories of Sigmund Freud and Alfred Adler and to define how his own perspective differed from theirs. Jung wrote, "In attempting to answer this question, I came across the problem of types for it is one's psychological type which from the outset determines and limits a person's judgment." (Jung, [1961] 1989:207) He concluded that Freud's theory was extroverted and Adler's introverted. (Jung, [1921] 1971: par. 91) Jung became convinced that acrimony between the Adlerian and Freudian camps was due to this unrecognized existence of different fundamental psychological attitudes, which led Jung "to conceive the two controversial theories of neurosis as manifestations of a type-antagonism." (Jung, 1966: par. 64)

96 Four Functions of Consciousness In the book, Jung categorized people into primary types of psychological function.

Jung proposed the existence of two dichotomous pairs of cognitive functions:

• The "rational" (judging) functions: thinking and feeling • The "irrational" (perceiving) functions: sensing and intuition

Jung went on to suggest that these functions are expressed in either an introverted or extroverted form.

Jung proposed four main functions of consciousness:

• Two perceiving functions: Sensation and Intuition

• Two judging functions: Thinking and Feeling

According to Jung, the psyche is an apparatus for adaptation and orientation, and consists of a number of different psychic functions. Among these he distinguishes four basic functions:

• Sensation - perception by means of the sense organs. • Intuition - perceiving in unconscious way or perception of unconscious contents. • Thinking - function of intellectual cognition and the forming of logical conclusions. • Feeling - function of subjective estimation.

Thinking and feeling functions are rational, while sensation and intuition are non- rational. According to Jung, rationality consists of figurative thoughts, feelings or actions with reason — a point of view based on objective value, which is set by practical experience. Non rationality is not based in reason. Jung notes that elementary facts are also non-rational, not because they are illogical but because, as thoughts, they are not judgments.

Attitudes: Extroversion (E)/Introversion (I)

Analytical Psychology distinguishes several psychological types or temperaments.

• Extravert (Jung's spelling, although some dictionaries prefer the variant "extrovert") • Introvert

97 Extroversion means "outward-turning" and introversion means "inward-turning." These specific definitions vary somewhat from the popular usage of the words.

The preferences for extroversion and introversion are often called as attitudes. Each of the cognitive functions can operate in the external world of behaviour, action, people, and things (extroverted attitude) or the internal world of ideas and reflection (introverted attitude).

People who prefer extroversion draw energy from action: they tend to act, then reflect, then act further. If they are inactive, their motivation tends to decline. To rebuild their energy, extroverts need breaks from time spent in reflection. Conversely, those who prefer introversion expend energy through action: they prefer to reflect, then act, then reflect again. To rebuild their energy, introverts need quiet time alone, away from activity.

The extrovert's flow is directed outward toward people and objects, and the introvert's is directed inward toward concepts and ideas. Contrasting characteristics between extroverts and introverts include the following:

• Extroverts are action oriented while introverts are thought oriented.

• Extroverts seek breadth of knowledge and influence while introverts seek depth of knowledge and influence.

• Extroverts often prefer more frequent interaction while introverts prefer more substantial interaction.

• Extroverts recharge and get their energy from spending time with people while introverts recharge and get their energy from spending time alone.

The functions are modified by two main attitude types: extroversion and introversion. In any person, the degree of introversion or extroversion of one function can be quite different from that of another function.

Functions: Sensing (S)/Intuition (N) and Thinking (T)/Feeling (F)

Jung identified two pairs of psychological functions:

• The two perceiving functions, sensing and intuition.

• The two judging functions, thinking and feeling.

98 Dominant Function

All four functions are used at different times depending on the circumstances. However, one of these four functions is generally used more dominantly and proficiently than the other three in a more conscious and confident way. This dominant function is supported by the secondary (auxiliary) function and to a lesser degree the tertiary function. The fourth and least conscious function is always the opposite of the dominant function. Myers called this inferior function the shadow.

Jung's typological model regards psychological type as similar to left or right handedness: individuals are either born with, or develop, certain preferred ways of thinking and acting. These psychological differences are sorted into four opposite pairs, or dichotomies with a resulting 16 possible psychological types. People tend to find using their opposite psychological preferences more difficult even if they can become more proficient (and therefore behaviourally flexible) with practice and development.

The four functions operate in conjunction with the attitudes (extroversion and introversion). Each function is used in either an extroverted or introverted way. A person whose dominant function is extroverted intuition, for example, uses intuition very differently from someone whose dominant function is introverted intuition.

The eight psychological types are as follows: • Extroverted Sensation • Introverted Sensation • Extroverted Intuition • Introverted Intuition • Extroverted Thinking • Introverted Thinking • Extroverted Feeling

• Introverted Feeling

The unconscious, inferior functions fail to develop imbalance results. In Psychological Types, Jung describes in detail the effects of tensions between the complexes associated with the dominant and inferior differentiating functions in highly one-sided individuals.

99 Vocation:

A vocation (Latin vocātiō - a call, summons), is a term for an occupation to which a person is specially drawn or for which he or she is suited, trained, or qualified. Though now often used in non-religious contexts, the meanings of the term originated in Christianity.

The idea of vocation is central to the Christian belief that God has created each person with gifts and talents oriented toward specific purposes and a way of life.

Vocational interests are preferences people have for activities that go with different vocations. So, for example, if you enjoy outdoor environments and nature and manual tasks you might be more suited to being a forester than an office worker.

Vocational Theories There are several types of theories of vocational choice and development. These types include trait and factor theories, social cognitive theories and developmental theories. Two examples of trait and factor theories also known as person– environment fit are Holland's Theory and Theory of Work Adjustment. Holland hypothesized six vocational personality/interest types and six work environment types: realistic, investigative, artistic, social, enterprising, and conventional. When a person's vocational interests match his or her work environment types, this is considered congruence. Congruence has been found to predict occupation and college major. The Theory of Work Adjustment (TWA), as developed by Dawis and Lofquist, hypothesizes that the correspondence between a worker's needs and the enforcer’s system predicts job satisfaction, and that the correspondence between a worker's skills and a job's skill requirements predicts job satisfactoriness. Job satisfaction and satisfactoriness together should determine how long one remains at a job. When there is a discrepancy between a worker's needs or skills and the job's needs or skills then change needs to occur either in the worker or the job environment.

Social Cognitive Career Theory (SCCT) has been proposed by Lent, Brown and Hackett. The theory takes Albert Bandura's work on self-efficacy and expands it to interest development, choice making, and performance. Person variables in SCCT include self-efficacy beliefs, outcome expectations and personal goals. The model also includes demographics, ability, values, and environment. Efficacy and outcome expectations are theorized to interrelate and influence interest development, which in turn influences choice of goals, and then actions. Environmental supports and barriers also affect goals and actions. Actions lead to performance and choice stability over time.

100 Career development theories propose vocational models that include changes throughout the lifespan. Super's model proposes a lifelong five-stage career development process. The stages are growth, exploration, establishment, maintenance, and disengagement. Throughout life, people have many roles that may differ in terms of importance and meaning. Super theorized that the career development is an implementation of self-concept. Gottfredson proposed a cognitive career decision-making process that develops through the lifespan. The initial stage of career development is hypothesized to be the development of self-image in childhood as the range of possible roles narrow using criteria such as sex-type, social class, and prestige. During and after adolescence people take abstract concepts into consideration such as interests.

Holland Codes:

The Holland Codes or the Holland Occupational Themes (RIASEC) represent a set of personality types described in a theory of careers and vocational choice formulated by the late psychologist John L. Holland beginning in the 1950’s. Each letter or code stands for a particular "type": Realistic (Doers), Investigative (Thinkers), Artistic (Creators), Social (Helpers), Enterprising (Persuaders) and Conventional (Organizers).

According to the Committee on Scientific Awards, Holland's research shows that personalities seek out and ourish in career environments they fit and that jobs and career environments are classifiable by the personalities that flourish in them. Holland also wrote of his theory that the choice of a vocation is an expression of personality. Furthermore, while Holland suggests that people can be categorized as one of six types, he also argues that a six-category scheme built on the assumption that there are only six kinds of people in the world is unacceptable on the strength of common sense alone. But a six category scheme that allows a simple ordering of a person's resemblance to each of the six models provides the possibility of 720 different personality patterns.

Doers (Realistic)

Independent, stable, persistent, genuine, practical, and thrifty [...] tasks that are tactile, physical, athletic, or mechanical [...] being outdoors, using tools, operating machines, interacting with animals, and working with their hands.

The examples are: Aerospace/ Astronaut, Agriculture, Anthropologist/ Paleontology/Archaeologist, Astronomy, Carpenter, Construction, Computer

101 Engineering, Dentist/Orthodontist, Diving, Driver, Electrician, Housekeeper, Martial Arts, Military, Police Officer, Plumber, Surgeon, Veterinarian/Animal Science, Waiter/Waitress etcetera.

Thinkers (Investigative) They are intellectual, introspective, and inquisitive. They are also curious, methodical, rational, analytical, and logical [...] scholarly, scientific, technical, or medical [...] avid readers. They like to solve problems, perform experiments, and conduct research.

The examples are: Computer Science/Information Technology, Computer Programmer, Higher Education, Lawyer, Professor (all fields), Psychologist (Ph. D.), Psychiatrist (Medical School) etcetera.

Creators (Artistic)

They are creative, intuitive, sensitive, articulate, and expressive. They are unstructured, original, nonconforming and innovative. They rely on feelings, imagination and inspiration. They like to work with ideas, abstractions, and concepts. They are spontaneous and open-minded.

The examples are: Art Schools, Creative writing/Poetry, Fashion Designer/Haute Couture etcetera.

Helpers (Social)

They are kind, generous, cooperative, patient, caring, helpful, empathetic, tactful, and friendly. They excel at socializing, helping others and teaching. They like tasks that involve teamwork, social interaction, relationship building and improvement of society.

The examples are: Activist/Community Organizer/Social Justice, Academic Advising, Child Care/Babysitter, Education/Counseling, Nurse, Nutritionist, Occupational Therapy etcetera.

Persuaders (Enterprising)

They are adventurous, ambitious, assertive, extroverted, energetic, enthusiastic, confident, and optimistic. They are dominant, persuasive, and motivational

102 [...] They like influencing others, being in charge, taking risks, debating, and competing.

The examples are: Activist, Administrative Assistant, Business/MBA, Buyer, Debate/ Forensics, Economics, Entrepreneur, Event Planning, Human Resources, Politics, Public Administration, Recruiter, Secretary, Telemarketing etcetera.

Organizers (Conventional):

They are conscientious and conservative. They are logical, efficient, orderly, and organized. They are thorough and detail-oriented. They value precision and accuracy. They are reliable. They enjoy practical tasks, quantitative measurements and structured environments. They follow the rules.

The examples are: Accounting/Tax advisor, Auditor, Banking, Bank Teller, Cashier, Clerk, Customer Service, Financial Analyst, Insurance, Management, Office Manager, Receptionist, Statistics etcetera.

Strong Interest Inventory

The Strong Interest Inventory (SII) is an interest inventory used in career assessment. The goal of this assessment is to give insight into a person's interests so that they may have less difficulty in deciding on an appropriate career choice for themselves. It is also frequently used for educational guidance as one of the most popular career assessment tools. The test was developed in 1927 by psychologist K. Strong, Jr. to help people exiting the military find suitable jobs. It was revised later by Jo-Ida Hansen and David Campbell. The modern version is based on the typology (Holland Codes) of psychologist John L. Holland. The newly revised inventory consists of 291 items, each of which asks you to indicate your preference from five responses. It is an assessment of interests and not to be confused with personality assessment or aptitude test.

The test can typically be taken in 25 minutes after which the results must be scored by computer. After scoring, an individual can then view how their personal interests compare with the interests of people in a specific career field. Access to the comparison database and interpretation of the results usually incurs a fee. Strong Interest Inventory is a registered trademark of CPP, Inc. of Mountain View, California.

103 The results include:

1. Scores on the level of interest on each of the six Holland Codes or General Occupational Themes.

2. Scores on 30 Basic Interest Scales (e.g. art, science and public speaking)

3. Scores on 244 Occupational Scales which indicate the similarity between the respondent's interests and those of people working in each of the 122 occupations.

4. Scores on 5 Personal Style Scales (learning, working, leadership, risk-taking and team orientation).

5. Scores on 3 Administrative Scales used to identify test errors or unusual profiles.

Strong-Campbell Interest Inventory:

Strong-Campbell Interest Inventory (also known as SCII or Strong-Campbell) is a test instrument in career counseling used to reveal career preferences according to interests of individuals within those careers. The instrument has a strong database and gives a wide variety of careers to consider but without regard to a person's specific personality type. The test utilizes the typology (Holland Codes) of psychologist John L. Holland.

The Strong-Campbell Interest Inventory is named after the American psychologists Edward K. Strong Jr. and David P. Campbell and includes the Strong Interest Inventory which was originally developed in 1927 by Strong.

The individuals belonging to a particular personality type prefer doing the work which supports their interest patterns. Their interest patterns might be influenced by their personality type which is subjective. The vocational interest patterns might be a result of their environment. The vocational interest pattern of the individuals is a result of their personality type. As implied from the Holland’s study, the personalities seek out and flourish in the career environments they fit and that job and career environments are classifiable by the personalities that flourish in them. The choice of vocation is an expression of personality. Thus, it can be said that the individuals consciously choose their career path by looking into the positive/beneficial factors as well as the negative/disadvantageous factors as perceived by their personality. The choice of getting into a highly decorated private sector or the securely pleasant government sector is dependent on the personality. The individuals belonging to private and the government sectors

104 would have their own reasons for joining the sector. The reasons would have played an important role in their decision to join that sector. They would have gauged the pros and cons of each sector before choosing the vocation in these two sectors. Even as being the employees under various government and private organizations they have the perception of the positive and negative reasons of each other’s sectors. The reasons might be similar but the emphasis on particular reasons might be dominant in each personality types. The reasons given by the employees belonging to each type of personality can be linked to their personality characteristics. Hence, the attempt has been made to know the personality types of the employees working in the government and the private sectors and the reasons for their choice in their respective sectors.

Methodology Sample:

The study was conducted on a sample of 129 employees of which 76 are from various government organizations and 53 are from various private organizations. The sample was collected using the convenient sampling method. The employees from various organizations under government and private sectors were chosen without any restrictions in age, sex, experience, and marital status. Tools Used:

1. Myer’s-Briggs type indicator (MBTI) questionnaire (modified version) was used in the study which has 20 questions in it measuring the four personality types- Sensing, Intuiting, Thinking and Feeling.

2. An open ended questionnaire was prepared to know the reasons for the employees choosing the government and private sectors which includes 11 questions dealing with the positive and negative factors in the government and private sectors. The questions were prepared by keeping in mind the general outlook of each of the two sectors. Analysis of the Study:

The obtained scores on the MBTI for an employee shows four different scores in it: One score which is higher than the other three scores is the dominant type in him and he belongs to that personality type. The employees belonging to the four different personality types are tabulated according to their types. The employees under government and private sectors are collectively tabulated under the personality types and a Mann-Whitney U test is done to check whether they

105 are independent of each other. This is done for all the 4 personality types. The reasons given out by the employees for selecting the sector are compiled and its frequency is noted for each personality types and it is compared between the private and government sector employees. From the obtained inferences, the conclusions are made. Results and Discussions

The aim of the study is to know the personality types of the employees in government and private sectors and the reasons for choosing the government or private sectors respectively. The study was conducted on a sample of 129 employees of which 76 are from various government organizations and 53 are from various private organizations. They were administered wit the Myers- Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) to know their personality type and an open ended questionnaire to know the reasons for their choice in the respective sectors. Table 1: Showing the scores of the employees who have scored high on the sensing type of the MBTI.

Government Private 35 27 29 27 27 28 33 29 28 29 29 32 26 30 26 28 42 31 30 31 31 30 33 28 30 26 32 32 31 28 32 29 32 29 30 30

106 27 27 28 27 29 30 26 32 28 29 28 30 28 28 31 33 30 30 29 27 N=36 N=20 z = 1.29

Table 1 shows the scores of the employees who have scored high on the sensing type of the MBTI. The scores of these individuals indicate that they are more likely to trust information that is present, tangible, and concrete, that is, the information that can be understood by the five senses. They tend to distrust hunches. They prefer to look for details and facts. A Mann-Whitney U test is done to find out whether the two samples, that is, government employees and private employees are independent of each other under the sensing type of MBTI. The z score obtained under both the samples was 1.29 which is equal and is not significant at 0.05 or 0.01 levels of significance suggesting that there is no difference among the samples and they are not two independent groups.

The sensing individuals working in the government sector reason out that it is the job security which is the most important reason for them to choose the government sector. They like the easy working environment, which has less pressure regarding the work accomplishment, fixed timings for work, timely pay, status linked to it,

107 loads of personal time which is available which in turn facilitates the interaction with public at workplace. The sensing individuals working in private sectors perceive that it is the job security and the easy working environment which makes them feel it as the factor for choosing the government organization which is the same reason emphasized by the sensing individuals under the government sector.

The private sector employees who are of sensing type say that it is the growth which is evident in private organization because of the abundant opportunities at work and the exposure they get as the main reason for choosing the private sector. They point out that the flexibility at work, scope for one’s idea, pay packages, challenging work, job rotation, recognition, job satisfaction, creativity development, goal oriented behavior and travel opportunities are the reasons for their choice. The sensing individuals under government sector perceive that it is the better pay package which is the main reason for the individuals choosing a career in private sector. They think that it is the work environment, recognition, opportunities for growth, learning, encouragement for one’s abilities, talent and work satisfaction as the factors for choosing a career in private sector.

The sensing individuals under private and government sector believe that there is indifference towards the performer and non performer, less opportunity for growth if working in a government organization. They say that there is monotonous work, less salary, frequent transfer, undue pressure from politicians and corruption is present at all levels of the government organization.

The sensing individuals under private and government sectors perceive the job insecurity as the most important factor under the negative factors prevalent in the private sector. The competition is high resulting in high pressure to meet the targets creating a stressful environment causing health problems. They feel that the organization exploits its employees. There is less time for personal work if working with a private organization according to the sensing individuals. Table 2 showing the scores of the employees who have scored high on the intuitive type of the MBTI.

Government Private 35 26 28 30 27 28 27 26 29 28

108 26 27 28 32 28 27 28 29 N=12 N=6

Z= 0.98

Table 2 shows the scores of the employees who have scored high on the intuitive type of the MBTI. The scores of these individuals indicate that they tend to trust information that is more abstract or theoretical that can be associated with other information (either remembered or discovered by seeking a wider context or pattern). They may be more interested in future possibilities. They tend to trust those flashes of insight that seem to bubble up from the unconscious mind. The meaning is in how the data relates to the pattern or theory. A Mann-Whitney U test is done to find out whether the two samples, that is, government employees and private employees are independent of each other under the intuitive type of MBTI. The z score obtained under both the samples was 0.98 which is equal and is not significant at 0.05 or 0.01 levels of significance suggesting that there is no difference among the samples and they are not two independent groups.

The intuitive individuals working in the government sector emphasize on the job security as the primary reason for choosing this sector along with the status, guaranteed income, free time which is involved in government sector. The individuals who score high on intuitive type in the private sector perceive that the security of the job, availability of leaves and lack of pressure being the factors favourable in a government sector.

The intuitive individuals working under both the sectors reason out that it is the salary and incentives which makes the private sector better along with opportunities for growth, better exposure in terms of work, recognition for work done, travel opportunities. However, the intuitive types in government sector perceive that there is better motivation and less transfers in private sector unlike theirs.

The intuitive individuals feel that the lack of time sense, lack of urgency is the main negative factor of working in the government sector. The individuals under both groups feel that the opportunities are less for growth and work is monotonous

109 leading to stagnation of career. There is corruption present with insincerity of the employees towards work causing a decreased efficiency at work.

The intuitive type of employees in the government and the private sectors find job insecurity and work pressure as the negative factors in the private sector leading to various health issues. However, the intuitive individuals under government sector also perceive that there is no fixed timing of work in the private sector, people are work centered and materialistic and creating tension for themselves by setting targets in short time. Table 3 showing the scores of the employees who have scored high on the thinking type of the MBTI.

Government Private 33 27 29 32 30 28 36 32 28 29 36 34 30 29 30 30 31 32 30 31 30 31 28 29 40 37 30 28 28 28 31 26 32 30 26 34 39 31 30 31 27 32 28 29

110 28 32 34 35 38 35 31 27 32 27 N=26 N=28

Z=0.16

Table 3 shows the scores of the employees who have scored high on the thinking type of the MBTI. The scores of these individuals indicate that they tend to decide things from a more detached standpoint as well as measuring the decision by what seems reasonable, logical, causal, consistent and matching a given set of rules. A Mann-Whitney U test is done to find out whether the two samples, that is, government employees and private employees are independent of each other under the thinking type of MBTI. The z score obtained under both the samples was 0.16 which is equal and is not significant at 0.05 or 0.01 levels of significance suggesting that there is no difference among the samples and they are not two independent groups.

The thinking individuals under private and government sectors are similar in their reason of job security for choosing the government sector. The individuals of thinking type under government sector also emphasize on the leave benefits, less work pressure, status in society, residential facilities and fixed work timing as the factors influencing them to work under the government sector. The individuals of thinking type under private sector perceive that it is the pension or retirement benefits which can also be a reason for choosing a government sector. They also believe that the leave policies, less pressure and status are reasons for choosing a government job.

The thinking individuals under private sector emphasize on the better salary with promotions based on abilities, abundant opportunities, challenging and creative work environment, less bureaucracy, more organized in terms of work as the factors for choosing the private sector which is similarly perceived by the thinking type under the government sector. However, the thinking type individuals under private sector believe that they learn better business ethics, have a youthful work environment, high standard of living and a systematic approach which made them to choose the private sector.

111 The negative reasons given out by the thinking individuals working under the government sector is led by the low salary package, lack of involvement in work, no recognition, delay in promotions, castiesm, lack of motivation, transfers and no scope for expression of one’s abilities and skills. The thinking type under private sector agree with the pay, less recognition, less promotional opportunities, and the reasons mentioned above. They also perceive that there is no honesty and sincerity among the individuals working in the government sector.

The negative reasons for working in the private sector given by the thinking individuals in the private sector and government sector are job insecurity, high work pressure, no timings for work, high stress, increased risk of health issues, no pension, harassment of women, less leave benefits, time oriented tasks. The thinking individuals under private sector believe that groupism and jealousy to be the negative factor influencing the work in the private sector. Table 4 showing the scores of the employees who have scored high on the feeling type of the MBTI.

Government Private 28 27 34 27 30 28 30 30 26 26 29 33 14 26 26 30 28 28 27 N=11 N=8

Z=0.041 Table 4 shows the scores of the employees who have scored high on the feeling type of the MBTI.

The scores of these individuals indicate that they tend to come to decisions by associating or empathizing with the situation, looking at it 'from the inside' and

112 weighing the situation to achieve, on balance, the greatest harmony, consensus and fit, considering the needs of the people involved. A Mann-Whitney U test is done to find out whether the two samples, that is, government employees and private employees are independent of each other under the feeling type of MBTI. The z score obtained under both the samples was 0.041 which is equal and is not significant at 0.05 or 0.01 levels of significance suggesting that there is no difference among the samples and they are not two independent groups.

The feeling type of individuals working in the government and the private sectors find the positive factors of choosing the government sector similarly. They lay stress on the permanent job, job security, working environment, leave policies, pensions, quarter’s facility, stipulated work hours, and government holidays.

The feeling type individuals in the private sector emphasize on the good pay as the positive factor for choosing the private sector. They also believe that there is quick growth in the career, recognition for the creative individuals, exposure to learning environment and enjoyment in the private sector. The feeling type of individuals in the government sector perceive that there is a growth in career based on the productivity, discipline and a better work culture is present in the private sector.

The feeling type of individuals in the private and government sectors are similar in their negative reasons for choosing the government sector. They believe that there are less promotional opportunities, less salary, monotonous work, employees who have an easy going nature towards work, transfers, corruption, less competition and political interference.

The feeling individuals under private and government sectors feel that job insecurity is the negative factor in choosing the private sector. The amount of work stress, health issues is more in private sector. Fewer holidays, bureaucracy is present in the private sector.

Conclusions: 1. There is no difference in the personality types of the employees working under the government and private sectors.

2. The employees of sensing type, intuitive type, thinking type and feeling type under the government and private sectors are not two independent groups.

3. The reasons given by the employees for selecting the private and the government sector were similar across the different personality types but

113 the frequency of the reason being stated differed for each of the personality types.

4. The different personality types of employees under government and private sectors are similar in their reason of high salary, faster growth, personal development and better work environment for choosing the private sector and the reason of job security, less work pressure and retirement benefits for choosing the government sector. Summary and Conclusion

Personality type refers to the psychological classification of different types of individuals. Effective personality typologies reveal and increase knowledge and understanding of individuals, as opposed to diminishing knowledge and understanding as occurs in the case of stereotyping. Effective typologies also allow for increased ability to predict clinically relevant information about people and to develop effective treatment strategies.

A vocation is a term for an occupation to which a person is specially drawn or for which he or she is suited, trained, or qualified.

Vocational interests are preferences people have for activities that go with different vocations. So for example if you enjoy outdoor environments, nature and manual tasks you might be more suited to being a forester than an office worker.

The present study was conducted to know the personality types of the employees in government and private sectors and the reasons for choosing the government or private sectors respectively. The study was conducted on a sample of 129 employees of which 76 were from various government organizations and 53 were from various private organizations. They were administered the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) to know their personality type and an open ended questionnaire to know the reasons for their choice in the respective sectors. From the obtained results it was seen that the government and private employees belonging to a particular personality type were not two independent groups. The reasons given out by the employees for selecting the private and the government sector were similar across the different personality types but the frequency of the reason being stated differed for each of the personality types. The different personality types of employees under government and private sectors were similar in their reason of high salary, faster growth, personal development and better work environment for choosing the private sector and the reason of job security, less work pressure and retirement benefits for choosing the government sector.

114 Applications of the Study: 1. The reasons given out by the employees can be used as an “eye-opener” for both the sectors which can improvise on the loop holes in their sectors and provide a better environment for the employees.

2. The personality type of the employees provides a better understanding of the employees by the organization.

3. The needs of the employees are understood and this helps in the retention of the employees.

4. The changes brought in by knowing the personality type and their reasons emphasized for a better work environment can increase the work productivity and job satisfaction.

References 1. Bernstein, Penner, Clarke-Stewart, & Roy. (2008). Psychology, 8th edition. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin Company.

2. Totton and Jacobs. (2001). Character and Personality Types. Philadelphia, PA: Open University Press.

3. Bess, T. L., & Harvey, R. J. (2001). Bimodal score distributions and the MBTI: Fact or artifact? Paper presented at the 2001 Annual Conference of the Society for Industrial and Organizational Psychology, San Diego, USA.

4. Furnham, A., & Crump, J. (2005). Personality Traits, Types, and Disorders: An Examination of the Relationship between Three Self-Report Measures. European Journal of Personality, 19, 167-184.

5. Asendorpf, J. B. (2003). Head-to-head comparison of the predictive validity of personality types and dimensions. European Journal of Personality, 17, 327–346.

6. Pittenger, D. J. (2004). The limitations of extracting typologies from trait measures of personality. Personality and Individual Differences, 37, 779–787.

7. McCrae, R. R., Terracciano, A., Costa, P. T., & Ozer, D. J. (2006). Person- factors in the California adult Q-set: Closing the door on personality types? European Journal of Personality, 20, 29-44.

8. Bates, K. L. (2006). Type A personality not linked to heart disease". Retrieved 2006-11-05.

115 9. Bottlender, Miriam, Preuss, U., & Soyka M. (2006). "Association of personality disorders with Type A and Type B alcoholics." European Archives of Psychiatry and Clinical Neuroscience 256 (1): 55–61. DOI:10.1007/s00406-005- 0601-y. PMID 09401334. Retrieved 21 February 2012.

10. Kagan, J. (1994). Galen's Prophecy: Temperament in Human Nature. New York: Basic Books.

11. Jung, Carl. (1976). Campbell, Joseph. ed. The Portable Jung. New York, NY: Penguin Books. pp. 178.

12. Myers, Isabel Briggs with Peter B. Myers. (1980, 1995). Gifts Differing: Understanding Personality Type. Mountain View, CA: Davies-Black Publishing. pp. xi–xii. ISBN 0-89106-074-X.

13. Keirsey, David. (May 1, 1998) [1978]. Please Understand Me II: Temperament, Character, Intelligence (1st Ed. ed.). Prometheus Nemesis Book Co. pp. 3. ISBN 1-885705-02-6.

14. Myers, Isabel Briggs with Peter B. Myers. (1980, 1995). Gifts Differing: Understanding Personality Type. Mountain View, CA: Davies-Black Publishing. ISBN 0-89106-074-X.

15. Jung, C.G., Psychological Types (The Collected Works of C.G. Jung, Vol.6), ISBN

16. Zeisset, Carolyn. (2006). The Art of Dialogue: Exploring Personality Differences for More Effective Communication. Gainesville, FL: Center for Applications of Psychological Type, Inc. p. 13. ISBN 0-935652-77-9.

17. Tieger, Paul D., & Barbara Barron-Tieger. (1999). The Art of Speed Reading People. New York, NY: Little, Brown and Company. pp. 66. ISBN 978-0- 316-84518-2.

18. University of Kansas, [http://www.assignmenthelps.com Career Assessments & Tests]. Counseling and Psychological Services web page.

19. Effects of Strong Interest Inventory Feedback on Career Beliefs. Day, Michael Andrew; Luzzo, Darrel Interest Inventory - Gale Encyclopedia of Psychology, 2nd ed. Gale Group, 2001

20. Anthony. Research report, 1997.

21. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/0191886988900256

22. http://psycnet.apa.org/journals/apl/69/3/390/

116 23. http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/j.1744-6570.2003.tb00143.x/ abstract

24. http://jca.sagepub.com/content/7/3/249.short

25. http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/j.2044-8325.1996.tb00614.x/ abstract

26. Riegel Hell, Slocum, Woodman, “Organizational Behavior”, 7th edition, West Publishing Company, Minneapolis/St. Paul New York, Los Angeles, San Francisco

Appendices Personal information:

INITIALS :

GENDER :

AGE :

SECTOR: (PVT./GOVT.) :

ORGANISATION :

EXPERIENCE :

Myer’s-Briggs type indicator (MBTI) questionnaire

Distribute the total 5 points between a & b based on the degree to which each is characteristic of you. 1. Are you more a - Pragmatic ( ) b - Idealistic ( ) 2. Are you more impressed by a - Standards ( ) b - Sentiments ( ) 3. Are you more interested in that which a - Convinces you by facts ( ) b - Emotionally moves ( ) 4. Its worse to be a - Impractical ( ) b - Having a boring routine ( )

117 5. Are you more attracted to a - A person with good common sense ( ) b - A creative person ( ) 6. In judging others are you more swayed by a - The rules ( ) b - The situation ( ) 7. Are you more interested in a - What has happened ( ) b - What can happen ( ) 8. Do you more often have a - Presence of mind ( ) b - Warm emotions ( ) 9. Are you more frequently a - A realistic sort of person ( ) b - An imaginative person ( ) 10. Are you more a - Faithful ( ) b - Logical ( ) 11. Are you more a - Action oriented ( ) b - Creation oriented ( ) 12. Which guides you more a - Your brain ( ) b - Your heart ( ) 13. Do you take pride in your a - Realistic outlook ( ) b - Imaginative ability ( ) 14. Which is more of a personal compliment a - You are consistent in your reasoning ( ) b - You are considerate of others ( ) 15. Are you drawn to a - Basics ( ) b - Implications ( ) 16. Is it better to be a - Fair ( ) b - Sentimental ( ) 17. Would you rather spend time with a - Realistic people ( ) b - Imaginative people ( ) 18. Would you describe yourself as a - Hard ( ) b - Soft ( ) 19. Would your friends say that you are a - Someone who is filled with new ideas ( ) b - Someone who is a realist ( )

118 20. It is better to be called a person who shows a - Feelings ( ) b - Reasonable consistency ( )

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Total: Total: A A B B

Open Ended Questionnaire: 1. Are you working for a private or a government organization?

2. Were you aware of the nature of work and the working conditions of your organization before you joined?

3. After joining the department/job how much of your knowledge about the organization was found to be agreeing with your opinion?

4. What are the positive or beneficial factors of an employee working for a private organization?

119 5. What are the positive or beneficial factors of an employee working for a government organization?

6. What are the negative factors for an employee working in a private organization?

7. What are the negative factors for an employee working in a government organization?

8. How could the efficiency of a private organization be enhanced?

9. How could the efficiency of a government organization be enhanced?

10. Do you believe that to work in a private organization a person should have certain qualities? If yes, what are they?

120 11. Do you believe that to work in a government organization a person should have certain qualities? If yes, what are they?

Master Sheet: Government Employees Sl. Initials Gender Age Orgs’n Exp. Sensing Intuitive Thinking Feeling No. 1 arb M 29 BWSSB 4 35 15 30 20 2 ng M 25 Can Bank 32 18 33 17 3 ls M 23 Can Bank 0.9 29 21 29 21 4 ms M 30 Admin. Off. 4 15 35 17 33 5 bsc M 34 BWSSB 6 25 25 30 20 6 cs M 35 7 22 28 22 28 7 kas F 60 Post Office 30 30 20 36 14 8 mc M 26 Can Bank 1.5 27 23 16 34 9 rs M 24 Can Bank 0.8 24 26 20 30 10 ce F 48 Can Bank 27 27 23 26 24 11 bsa M 58 Can Bank 36 33 17 21 29 12 bcs F 28 College 1 28 22 28 22 Research 13 ab F 26 Org. 3 23 27 26 24 14 ssa F 30 College 4 26 24 20 30 15 ke M 38 Can Bank 17 29 21 36 14 16 mrr M 57 Can Bank 34 29 21 25 25 17 ss M 56 Can Bank 31 26 24 25 25 18 pcm M 55 Can Bank 32 28 22 30 20 19 vsr M 45 Can Bank 24 27 23 30 20 20 ajs M 55 Can Bank 32 29 21 31 19 21 a M 50 Can Bank 30 25 25 24 26 22 nr F 49 Can Bank 28 26 24 25 25 23 ps M 54 Can Bank 34 42 8 41 9 24 nca F 26 BHEL ISG 1 26 24 30 20 25 vk M 59 Railways 35 30 20 28 23

121 26 yr M 22 BHEL ISG 1 31 19 27 23 27 ksm M 49 BHEL ISG 26 25 25 21 29 28 dr M 47 BHEL ISG 30 33 17 31 19 29 sr M 29 BHEL ISG 5 30 20 21 29 30 al M 25 BHEL ISG 2 4 11 11 14 31 rhh M 23 BHEL ISG 32 18 28 22 32 g M 23 BHEL ISG 31 19 27 23 33 kvrr M 28 BHEL ISG 3 32 18 28 22 34 v M 58 BHEL ISG 34 32 18 30 20 35 kmr M 55 BHEL ISG 30 29 16 30 20 36 av M 53 BHEL ISG 30 30 20 25 25 37 cs M 30 BHEL ISG 1 26 24 28 22 38 kmb M 59 BHEL ISG 35 37 13 40 10 39 r F 52 Can Bank 31 27 23 26 24 40 mvb M 57 Can Bank 34 30 20 30 20 41 hss M 57 Can Bank 35 23 27 25 25 42 ak M 32 Can Bank 2.5 28 22 28 22 43 mp F 41 Can Bank 11 28 22 31 19 44 ss M 56 Can Bank 35 29 21 28 22 45 rn M 52 Can Bank 31 30 20 26 24 46 b M 50 Can Bank 25 26 24 24 26 47 vv M 28 Can Bank 2.5 32 18 21 29 48 ssu M 53 Can Bank 16 28 22 24 26 49 nbv F 35 Can Bank 7 28 22 32 18 50 vm F 53 RBI 29 29 21 26 24 51 vsm M 55 Can Bank 28 21 29 26 24 52 sbs F 45 Can Bank 22 24 26 26 24 53 hsr M 50 Can Bank 27 35 15 39 11 54 ash M 28 Can Bank 8 28 22 26 24 55 im M 54 Can Bank 32 30 20 21 29 City Civil 56 kha M 45 Court 25 28 22 22 28 57 rg F 37 BWSSB 4 28 22 22 28 58 pal F 29 BWSSB 0.1 31 19 27 23

122 59 ms M 25 BWSSB 6.3 28 22 30 20 60 ks M 28 BWSSB 6 25 25 27 23 61 amvr M 28 BWSSB 0.2 22 28 28 22 62 al M 37 BWSSB 5 18 32 27 23 63 p F 21 BWSSB 0.1 25 25 23 27 64 sal M 32 BWSSB 1 25 25 28 22 65 ms M 27 BWSSB 1.3 30 20 34 16 66 ks M 28 BWSSB 1.2 22 28 24 26 67 tkk M 27 BWSSB 1.7 33 17 28 22 68 rp M 29 BWSSB 2 23 27 38 12 69 vkpb M 26 BWSSB 1 23 27 24 26 70 rm F 28 BWSSB 1 30 20 25 25 71 bs F 25 BWSSB 1 30 20 24 26 72 r F 24 BWSSB 6 22 28 24 26 73 j M 30 BWSSB 7.5 21 29 31 19 74 mr M 43 Can Bank 23 29 21 28 22 75 prk F 47 Can Bank 28 27 23 26 24 76 ssd F 24 Can Bank 0.6 21 29 24 26 77

Master Sheet: Private Employees

Sl. No. Initials Gender Age Orgs’n Exp. Sensing Intuitive Thinking Feeling 1 M 23 SSgA 24 26 25 25 2 F 32 8 27 23 27 23 3 F 28 4 25 25 23 27 4 M 28 7 27 23 32 18 5 M 29 6 27 23 23 27 6 F 28 22 28 22 7 sm M 29 21 25 25 8 pe M 27 5.7 29 21 27 23 9 ms F 24 3 32 18 23 27 10 d M 26 SSgA 1.5 29 21 32 18 11 n M 26 SSgA 3 26 24 29 21

123 12 nss F 25 PCS Ltd. 2 30 20 34 16 Ferrgal 13 ss M 23 Tech 1 27 23 29 21 14 F 23 0.1 30 20 30 20 15 k M 25 TCS 2.3 29 21 32 18 16 28 22 27 23 17 pe M 24 TCS 2.1 26 24 31 19 18 kc F 23 TCS 2 31 19 31 19 19 s F TCS 4 20 30 24 26 20 jp M 24 TCS 4 28 22 29 21 21 M 26 TCS 4.5 31 19 27 23 22 lg F 25 TCS 2.5 29 21 37 13 23 lr F 30 TCS 6 23 27 28 22 24 F 26 TCS 3.6 24 26 28 22 25 be F 25 TCS 3.5 30 20 27 23 26 sr F 28 TCS 5 28 22 25 25 27 nvc F 23 TCS 2 26 24 26 24 28 ma M 28 TCS 3 28 2 30 21 29 vn M 26 TCS 2 27 23 22 28 30 dp F 24 TCS 3.6 28 22 20 30 31 bs F 23 TCS 0.6 25 25 24 26 32 cm F 25 32 18 27 23 Northern 33 mp M 29 Trust 3 27 23 34 16 34 ku F 23 NT 0.2 28 22 27 23 35 ds F 20 NT 29 21 28 22 36 sb M 24 NT 0.1 30 20 31 19 37 md M 25 NT 0.2 29 21 28 22 38 gp M 20 NT 0.2 30 20 27 23 39 n M 24 NT 0.6 26 24 31 19 40 25 25 32 18 41 pg F 20 NT 0.1 27 23 17 33 42 ap M 23 NT 2 24 26 29 21 43 h F 22 NT 0.8 22 28 26 24

124 44 ts M 21 NT 1.1 31 19 32 18 45 kd F 28 NT 3.9 24 26 24 26 46 ad M 22 NT 1.3 24 26 20 30 47 at M 24 AITPL 1 31 19 35 15 48 ar M 27 AITPL 5 33 17 35 15 49 ssp M 24 AITPL 1 22 28 23 27 50 rv f 22 HIL 0.6 27 23 24 26 51 vln M 24 AITPL 1 23 27 27 23 52 nk M 26 ITIL 2 31 19 32 18 53 ssa F 25 College 1 27 23 27 23

125 The Interlock Model for Sustainable Economic Development – the Learning from Kerala and Gujarat Development Stories Gopan G.S.1

Abstract

The research paper attempts to study the interlock model for sustainable economic development by comparing and contrasting the two models of development, that is, of Kerala and Gujarat. The paper studies this topic keeping in mind the socio-economic problems and perils faced by India, development and economic growth are seen as a panacea to all these problems. Both the models have churned out many developmental expositions to their credits and hence may seem to portray a protracted defence of the underlying ideologies. The scope of this paper is not to be a soothsayer for these models nor cynically identify and analyse the weakness in these models but to develop a simple model integrating the approach of the two success stories.

Keywords: Interlock Model of Sustainable Development, Kerala Model of Development, Gujarat Model of Development, Socio-economic Problems, Development, Economic Growth.

Introduction

“India is not, as people keep calling it, an underdeveloped country, but rather, in the context of its history and cultural heritage, a highly developed one in an advanced state of decay.” -Shashi Tharoor

1. HoD & Assistant Professor, Department of Management Studies, T. John College.

126 The above statement may not be a sweet hearkening for an exalter of India’s latest development story. There is no denying the fact that India has progressed in leaps and bounds in the last few decades. But when seen from the background of India’s glorious heritage these achievements may seem to lose their sheen. The country is making an arduous effort to regain its past glory and be the growth engine of the world. Development and economic growth is seen as a panacea to root out the many socio-economic troubles and perils which dot the country.

It is argued well enough that social and cultural development has to go hand in hand with economic development. But it is hard enough a task to make these two seemingly paradoxical concepts to walk and work together. A good way of expressing this thought is the perceived conflict between good economics and good politics. We had many leaders who could make this seemingly difficult task work well. Maintaining a developmental model for a long duration and making it work calls for strong economic sense and political will. We may have to look at many sources and stories for inspiration to make it happen.

The effort in this paper is to analyse two developmental stories. These stories are deciphered not only by their geographical distance but also in their ideological dimensions - The Kerala Model of Development vs. the Gujarat Model of Development. Both the models have churned out many developmental expositions to their credits and hence may seem to portray a protracted defence of the underlying ideologies. The purpose of this paper is not to be a soothsayer for these models nor cynically identify and analyse the weakness in these models but to develop a simple model integrating the approach of the two success stories.

1. Kerala Model of Development 1.1 Kerala - A Look Back

The state of Kerala has played a significant role in the socio-economic history of India and the world. Kerala has a unique geographical location. Though moved away from the vast plains of North India, the proximity to the Arabian Sea opened up a vast open door for Europeans and other naval powers to step their foot on this land. The search of these powers for a sea route to the eastern world and the consequential landing of Vas Co Da Gama in Kerala led to the arrival of the European powers in India. The demand for spices in the far west was a reason enough beckoning the powerful to find sea routes to India. The trade winds took these Europeans right into the waters of Arabian Sea and then to Kerala. The arrival of Portuguese, Danes, French and English happened very quickly.

127 Post-independent Kerala witnesses a lot of political turmoil. The first communist government elected through ballet in the world took power in Kerala. Kerala also earned the dubious distinction of the first state in India to come under Presidential Rule in India. However, the socio–cultural fabric of Kerala coupled with some good governance led to a silent revolution catapulting Kerala to one of the better states in India leading to a loquacious new dictum to the field of development- the Kerala Model of Development. 1.2 Kerala Model of Development

The brain child behind this model of development is K. N. Raj, a renowned economist of India. At the behest of then Kerala Chief Minister C. Achuta Menon, K. N. Raj started the Centre for Development Studies in the capital city of Kerala. The Kerala Model of Development was the result of these reticent studies conducted by this centre in association with United Nations in 1970’s. Much in line with the later developments of Human Development Economics (which took concrete shape in 1990’s), the Kerala Model gave importance to social parameters like education, child development, poverty alleviation, land reforms etc.

Kerala has a higher standard of living comparable with developed nations. The astonishing part is that this achievement comes on a base of low per capita income. Let’s look into the factors contributing to this success.

1.3 Contributing Factors 1.3.1 Health Care

The health care indices of Kerala make for some astonishing reading and numbers some even par with developed countries of the world. Kerala has built an effective healthcare system. Kerala has a vast network of primary health centres which ensures high accessibility with less cost. Coupled with this is the higher level of literacy and traditional ayurvedic system – Kerala emerged as the best state in healthcare.

128 Table 1 Health Indicators Kerala India Birth rate (per 1,000 population) 14.60 22.80 Death rate (per 1,000 population) 6.60 7.40 Infant mortality rate (per 1,000 population) 6.70 44.00 Maternal mortality ratio (per lakh live births) * 40 301 2009 Total Fertility rate (per woman) 1.70 2.90 Couple Protection rate (%) 62.30 52 Life at birth (Male) 71.40 62.60 Life at birth (Female) 76.30 64.20 Life at birth (Average) 74.00 63.50

Source: Medical and Public Health (PDF): Kerala Government (July 2010)

The vast network of government and highly efficient private sector has helped Kerala maintain these impressive figures albeit many problems are emerging from the recent developments in the health care sector. Let us focus our attention to one of the most neglected area of health care – Palliative care. Kerala also has impressive records in the palliative care services. In fact Kerala has a palliative care policy. Two – third of India’s palliative care services are in Kerala. (Kerala has only 3% of India’s total population). Kerala’s Community Based Neighbourhood Network in Palliative Care Project has played a significant role in this achievement. The health care in Kerala could achieve such magnificent numbers due to the combined effort of government support and civic involvement.

1.3.2 Education

Christian missionaries have played a crucial role in the development of education in Kerala. They introduced western education to Kerala. Caste or religion never came in the way of this educational revolution. The enlightened Hindu saints exhorted their followers to embrace modern education and helped in constructing various schools and colleges. The Muslim Educational Society also contributed to the cause. Thanks to the efforts of the various princely states and British policy, the literacy rate in Kerala was twice that of the rest of India. Post-independence, the government continued to press the issue and achieved noticeable results.

129 Kerala has clocked stellar performance in the field of education - near total literacy, universal primary education, low dropout rate, easy access to education and gender equality in this access. This was the result of many long sighted activities of the various governments in Kerala. The state has the highest expenditure on education in comparison to its domestic product and accounts for one-third of the total revenue expenditure. The government has come up with many innovative and effective programs like DPEP (District Primary Education Program), Single window admission procedures, counselling etceera which gave fruits of success to the state. Graph 1

Source: Census of India 1.3.3 Land Reforms

The revolutionary Land Reforms Ordinance passed by the first communist government of Kerala/world was a watershed in the land reforms movement in Kerala. The movement which was a continuation of the peasant movement in Kerala helped in removing the ill effects of tenancy and land lord system. The ordinance put a seal on the land holdings by any particular family. It broke the backbone of the feudal structure and the tenants could claim the excess land on which they were working.

Even though such radical measure put a premature end to the communist government of the time, it produced many positive outcomes. It resulted in many landless people getting dwelling place of their own and enlargement of the

130 labour market. These steps were followed by the introduction of effective public distribution system, protection for agricultural labourers and various protective laws for agricultural workers. All these steps helped in ensuring consistent progress and transformation of the society. 1.3.4 Other Factors

Kerala has been fortunate enough to have a proper socio-cultural mix which supports human development. As already mentioned the princely states of Kerala were development oriented and had already set a ground for the post– independence government to scale up an existing goods system. The people are politically active and they are active participants in the political process. Any lethargy in the governance is a matter of intense discussion – building up the pressure on the government and its employees. The gulf boom of the 1970’s has helped maintain the ascent in the social indices performance. It provided a cascading effect to the already existing higher human development indices. The diverse population of Kerala (Hindus-60%, Muslims–20% and Christians–20%) has lived in peace and harmony leaving the government to developmental issues. 1.3 Kerala Model of Development - Flip Side The Kerala Developmental Model also has its problematic side. The model has not been able to stimulate economic growth of the state. Even though the state ranks very high in the human development indices, the state is one of the least industrialized states in India. The state has failed in converting the educated and skilled manpower to a productive use. There is enormous brain drain and Kerala is witnessing the replacement migration (from West Bengal and North East in particular). The economy is heavily dependent on remittances especially from Middle East. The state failed in converting these remittances to any meaningful investments and led to the state having highest per capita consumption expenditure in the country.

With it’s over politicisation, strikes and notorious labour unions in Kerala are one of the most difficult places to do business in India. The state is dependent on its neighbouring states for its food grains and vegetables (quiet contradictory since Kerala is a lush green place with fertile soil and the first region to shake hand with the monsoon winds every year – heralding the rainy season of India). The state’s macroeconomic figures make for acrid reading – the state budget is spiralling in the fiscal deficit trap and the state has a very high unemployment rate. There are pockets of complete underdevelopment (tribal and coastal area) which are often the scene of unrest and violence. In short, the Kerala model has a lot to teach and a lot to learn.

131 2. Gujarat Model of Development 2.1. Gujarat – A Look Back

The state of Gujarat has a chequered history with its link running back to the ancient history (Lothal – the oldest port in the world was in Gujarat). Running through the hands of various Hindu and Muslim kingdoms, the state came under the power of Marathas in the 18th century. Post the Anglo- Maratha wars, the state like the rest of India came under the British rule. Many princely states of Gujarat made peace treaties with British and the region came under these princely states. The greatest son of India, Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi was born in Gujarat who led the Independence struggle ultimately leading to Indian independence.

The state of Gujarat was formed in 1960, by splitting Bombay presidency on the linguistic basis. The Congress party ruled the state till mid 1990s and the Bharatiya Janata Party thereafter. Ever since its inception in 1960 the state has accorded highest priority to secondary sector over primary and tertiary sectors. The priority for physical capital over human capital was very clear. In line with the LPG policy of the national government, the state government tuned their approach to maximize the benefits. In the nineties, the government made efforts to promote private enterprises in the state. This continued focus on economic growth led to what is known as Gujarat Model of Development. Graph 2 – Growth in GDP for state of Gujarat

Source: Socio–Economic Review, Gujarat State, 2014-15 (Directorate of Economics and Statistics)

132 2.2 Gujarat Model of Development

The Gujarat Model of Development tends to emphasise economic growth as the way ahead to come out of underdevelopment and poverty. The state has created one of the best business friendly environments in the country couple with this is the entrepreneurial spirit of the Gujarati community; the stage was well set for galloping economic growth. The state government have shown confidence in the capability of the private sector and created an environment of economic freedom. The Gujarat model tends to focus on the belief that the economic growth will trickle down to the rural and poor segment of the society and ultimately lead to their emancipation. 2.3 Contributing Factors 2.3.1 Tax Incentives

The government planned reduction or exemption of sales tax as a major tool to attract private business into the state. This was a major economic decision since sales tax is the major revenue of the state. With other states following the step the Gujarat government shifted to subsidies and cost reduction than tax exemptions. To attract more investments into the state the government tuned its policy towards cost reduction through subsidies quintessentially portraying an image of investor friendly state. Another step in this direction was the rationalization of taxes. A case in point would be the partial abolition of Octroi – which was leading to many inefficiencies and corruption in the system. The focus was on creating productive activity first rather than social capital. 2.3.2 Infrastructural Support

For a growth based development story, infrastructure is going to be the script or the backbone. The reforms were drastic in the power sector. The government took the courage to act as the shock absorber to attract private investments into the sector. As a result the government succeeded in attracting Independent Power Projects (IPP) to supply power to Gujarat Electricity Board. After initial bouts of success, the new initiative started showing side effects, with Gujarat Electricity Board becoming a major contributor to the state fiscal deficit and other related structural problems. The Gujarat Electricity Regulatory Commission was created to monitor the functioning of the various players in the sector. The government also encouraged private participation in other sectors like ports and roads through Build Operate and Transfer (BOT) and joint ventures. To provide financial assistance to these infrastructure projects the government created an Asset Management Fund. Industrial estates and sheds were another effort to boost the infrastructural facilities.

133 Graph: 3

Source: Socio–Economic Review, Gujarat State, 2014-15 (Directorate of Economics and Statistics) 2.3.3 Industrial Approvals

For the development of industries a speedy approval process without red tape and corruption is essential. At the district level, the District Industries Centre (DIC) has been delegated all essential powers for all registration and subsidy purposes. There are various agencies at the district and state level to monitor the functioning of various agencies, leading to effectiveness in operation. The inspection process has been made more business friendly and there was a continuous effort to add various un-organized business into the structure to allow them to make use of these facilities. The documentation for registration of new business units has been made leaner and an easy process. Even though the large industries licensing and registration is routed through the national bodies, all necessary support and follow up is done by the state government. Computerization and citizens’ charter have ensured in eliminating all unnecessary delays and hazards in the way of approvals and legality. 2.3.4 Other Factors

The government took bold initiatives to make land available for sales and development. This excess land in possession of industrial units was made available for sales by putting a land ceiling. The Town Planning Act ensured that barren and underdeveloped land is available for infrastructural development. The government has amended the Bombay Rent Control Act (1947) to ensure availability of houses for rent. Permission was granted with conditions for conversion of agricultural land to non – agricultural uses. This ensured that land is available for rapid industrialization of the state.

134 The entrepreneurial spirit of the Gujarati community was the right supplement for such a development story. This business acumen of the people in Gujarat was a major contributing factor for the model. The state had a stable political environment and the various political parties more or less showed faith in the model. 2.4 Gujarat Model of Development – Flip Side

As the state basks in the glory of this economic growth, the flip sides also need to be analyzed. The trickling down of development is yet to happen and the poor people have paid a heavy price - the state has one of the highest levels of poverty in India. The human development indices for the state (especially food, education, health) make for very sorry reading. The rehabilitation of displaced farmers, tribals, agricultural workers etcetera has not yet been settled. The people are paying a huge price for the high pollution level, due to the focus on lofty industrial growth. Many have even questioned the reality behind the rapidly flowing FDI to the state and the states macroeconomic discipline. The Gujarat Model seems to portray a model with many negative ramifications when seen from the above perspectives. Graph 4 Graph 5

Source: Census India Website

135 3. The Interlock Model for Sustainable Economic Development

The model tries to integrate the Kerala Model of Development and the Gujarat Model of Development. As already noted in the discussions before, the Kerala Model focusses on the social infrastructure (human development) and the Gujarat Model focusses on the physical infrastructure (economic growth).

As the overall development is a mix of social development and economic growth – these two factors become the engine for overall growth. An economy needs to twirl both these wheels to keep the overall development on track. If not, as we have already seen, the economy may miss out on one of the aspects – Kerala belligerently treading bottom low in the graph of industrial growth and Gujarat languishing along with the bottom states in the social developmental parameters. To vanquish these capacious undermining facts and figures, the various stakeholders need to deliberate and fish out new developmental models.

Now the question is whether it is possible to debunk the model and have both these wheels twirling at the same time to ensure overall development. We may have to look at the institutional analysis in social science to find an answer to the question. The institutional view/field deals with how individuals and groups construct institutions, how institutions function in practice, and the effects of institutions on each other, on individuals, societies and the community at large.

136 The above model also looks up on the institutional view for its fuel. The social aspects of the economy should be the responsibility of the state/government – with bulk of its fiscal expenditure going on related aspects like health, education, social security etcetera. The physical infrastructure – growth industrialization etcetera should be left in the capable hands of the private sector.

This may seem as purification of the mixed economy system. While there is no denying the roots to the mixed economy system the models re-emphasizes the need for such an approach and suggests some modification. The most important is the smooth interaction and support between the two institutions – private and public. The public institutions have to develop the base for the private institutions. In the initial stage, some extent of hand holding for the private sector may also be required. We can look at an ideal case in point – the educational sector (Public) contributing skilled jobs, that is, readymade employees to the private industries on a continuous basis. The competition driven private sector is generating more profit and contributing it to the state treasury in the form of corporate taxes. Hence, the state has more funds for social development etcetera. Delineating the model to the next level and to make the model a sustainable one we need to call for so many lubricating factors – good governance, able and learned leadership, stable political system etcetera. If these lubricants are applied and operated we can have a perfect working model of development.

References 1. Menon, A. Shreedara. (2007). Kerala History. Kottayam: DC Books.

Websites 1. http://iimahd.ernet.in/publications/data/2002-12-02 Ravindra H. Dholakia. pdf

2. http://www.firstpost.com/business/economy/kerala-growth-model-is- gujarat-model-in-disguise

3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keralamodel

137 Opportunities and Challenges for Entrepreneurship for Make in India: Textiles' and Garments’ Industry Hemalatha I. Doddamani1

Abstract

The Indian textiles and garments industry flourished as early as the Indus Valley civilization. All the rulers and the society used locally produced clothes and were contended. The arrival of the British and their method of exporting the raw materials and bringing back the finished products, lack of organized structure in this industry, research and use of machinery pegged back the Indian garment industry. It remained so till the 1990’s, post the liberalization, the industry has become more organized and catching pace with rest of the world. The start-ups or the entrepreneurs willing to take a plunge into this industry have unlimited scope and opportunities in the form of producing better and finer forms of fabrics in silk, cotton, denims and a host of other modern, natural and artificial varsities. Since India is a land of diversities we have traditional textiles and garments which still remain confined to those geographical areas. Moreover our fashion designers over the past decade have lessened the gap between the western designers and put India on the fashion map. While there is a buzz to jump on to the band wagon in exploring the limitless opportunities, one must not lose sight of the challenges which

1. Assistant Professor, Department of Fashion and Apparel Design, T. John College.

138 begin the way the opposition starts at our doorsteps at home and amongst friends at the idea of beginning a start-up, the challenges at the ground level also include finding angel funders, support for research and development, establishing production lines with modern machinery, marketing and selling the products and finding dedicated skilled labour to work with. The bigger challenges are a stiff and highly competitive global market, obtaining land and licenses, higher level of research and development, global exposure and breaking the monopoly of the west. The fresh initiative of the incumbent Government and push for Make in India may render some of these challenges not so challenging and encourage more entrepreneurs who may venture into large scale participation in this industry which perhaps has been dormant so far. This will not only bring the country on par with the rest of the world but also contribute to the nation’s economy and provide employment to millions of our countrymen.

Keywords: Entrepreneurship, Textiles, Apparel Industry, Fashion.

Introduction

The Indian textiles and garments industry has flourished from as early as the Indus Valley civilization. All the rulers and society used locally produced clothes and were contended. The arrival of British and their method of exporting the raw materials and bringing back the finished products, lack of organized structure in this industry, research and use of machinery pegged back the Indian garment industry. As a result the Indian Textile and Apparel Industry was unorganized industry even till a few years back, however the scenario started changing after the economic liberalization of Indian economy in 1991. This initiative of opening up of economy gave the much-needed boost to the Indian textile and apparel industry which has now successfully become one of the largest in the world. Indian textile industry largely depends upon the textile and apparel manufacturing and export. India earns about 27% of its total foreign exchange through textile/ apparel exports. The industry provides direct employment to approximately 40 million and is the second only to agriculture.

In the world’s production statistics, our country ranks second in production of textiles and garments, third in production of cotton and is the second largest cotton user. The Indian textile industry is very diverse and complex and this complexity is merged into a cohesive whole. This is possible as we have a strong

139 production base of different fibres / yarns from natural fibers like cotton, jute, silk and wool to synthetic/man-made fibres like polyester, viscose, nylon and acrylic. The growth of this industry in the recent past has been more than any of the previous decades as growth got a fillip due to liberalization of trade and economic policies in the 90s.

The start-ups or the entrepreneurs willing to take a plunge into this industry have unlimited scope and opportunities in the form of producing better and finer forms of fabrics in silk, cotton, denims and host of other modern natural and artificial varsities. Since India is a land of diversities we have traditional textiles and garments which still remain confined to those geographical areas. A lot can be done to mix and match and produce raw materials in a host of hues and designs that can form the basis of the world fashion industry. Moreover, our fashion designers over the past decade have lessened the gap between the western designers and put India on the fashion map. The fashion designers can widen their base and produce not only textiles but also garments that can dress the world.

While there is a buzz to jump on to the band wagon in exploring the limitless opportunities, one must lose sight of the immense challenges which begin at our doorstep. The fresh initiative of the incumbent Government and push for Make in India may render some of these challenges not so challenging and encourage more entrepreneurs who may venture into large scale participation in this industry which perhaps has been dormant so far. This will not only bring the country on par with the rest of the world but also contribute to the nation’s economy and provide employment to millions of our countrymen. On the other hand, it will also change the way we wear our clothes and make us look and feel better.

Scope

The scope of this paper is as follows: a. Opportunities for entrepreneurship in Textiles and Apparel Industry. b. Challenges for entrepreneurship in Textiles and Apparel Industry.

Opportunities for Entrepreneurship in Textiles and Apparel Industry

The Indian textiles and apparel industry has huge opportunities to grow in the wake of market liberalisation. These opportunities are listed below:

140 a. Research and Development

Like any other industry, the research and development has endless opportunity here too. This can be in the field of developing new fabrics both artificial and natural, fusion of variety of raw materials and designs, to develop climate effect reduction fabrics, fabrics that are economical to produce, wear and maintain and so on. In the apparel production, there is endless scope to bring the local geographically isolated styles/prints/embroidery etcetera to mainstream and within every ones reach. b. Accessibility For the entrepreneurs there is easy accessibility to study, do research, create infrastructure, find information, a friendlier licencing system, funding etcetera which makes it easier than before to initiate a start-up. c. Dispersed Production and Easy Assembling

In today’s world, where everything is in reach, the entrepreneurs need not have all THE facilities under one roof, the production can be dispersed while the final assembly can be done under one roof thereby reducing the burden of space, sourcing and labour. d. Marketing and Sales.

The advent of internet and ecommerce has rendered this vital activity which earlier required enormous efforts very easy to handle. The advertising, market study, sales, delivery and payments can all be done within the click of a button; hence the huge investments are not required. e. Technology.

The phenomenal growth in technology and its easy access will help the entrepreneurs in every aspect of venturing into the apparel and textile industry. It will provide unlimited access to information, designing, observing the end products’ effectiveness, sales, marketing, tracking shipping and delivery, instant credits there by reducing costs and increasing productivity and profits. f. Increased Fashion Awareness

The youth today are more fashion conscious and willing to experiment, hence, there is an existing demand and our industry needs to step in to fulfil this demand locally than to depend on foreign markets.

141 g. Haute Couture

Considered a privilege of royalty and for a selected few for a long time, this myth has been breached and there are more people willing to spend in this segment making it lucrative for the start-ups. h. Extreme Weather/Climatic Conditions

The fast changing climatic conditions which now affect a large population provides an opportunity to develop fabrics and apparel to negate these effects. Since larger areas come under this, with each passing year, the requirement too is increasing giving the start-ups an opportunity to venture into these areas. i. Technical Textiles

Technical textiles are those “Textile materials and products manufactured for industry specific performance and functional properties beyond aesthetic or decorative requirements. The demand for these textiles is increasing as the end products’ usage is on the upswing in various professions like agriculture, clothing, construction, health care, transportation, packaging, sports, environment protection, protective wear etcetera. They include textiles for automotive applications, medical textiles, agro-textiles, and protective clothing. Projected global business of technical textiles worth US$ 100 billion, the growth in Asia is expected to be 5 to 6%, with the projected growth rate of approximately 2% in the developed countries. In spite of serious challenges this segment provides possibilities to minimize imports through home based production and by encouraging exports.

Challenges for Entrepreneurship in Textiles and Apparel Industry

The entrepreneurial spirit will prosper if the economy continues to grow on a sustainable basis. The risks to entrepreneurial growth are many, terrorism, political corruption/stalemate, non-inclusive growth that focuses only on the rich, and stalled reforms. Terrorism in India that has spread almost throughout the length and breadth of our country which creates fear and uncertainty and delays investments therefore needs to tackle appropriately. The Indian culture is resilient and able to respond sensibly to terrorist activities as demonstrated during our response to the terrorist attacks in Mumbai and Kargil. India is a complex country with varied castes, religions and languages. The political parties have evolved to address their needs and give the minority groups a platform and a

142 voice that are heard at the national level. However, irrespective of whether the government is lead by BJP or Congress we have not reversed the liberalization agenda. Growth needs to continue and reforms aimed at power, labor and land are a major requirement.

Challenges a) Governance

The main and obvious challenges that are relevant in our country are red- tapism and bureaucracy. Despite the liberalization the government machinery takes ages to provide necessary clearances and provide legitimate permissions without corruption. b) Globalization

Until a few years ago the Indian entrepreneurs faced regional and national competition. However, now as most countries have opened up their economies and the world has become one large market, entrepreneurs must prepare themselves with new, better, and innovative business tactics and skills. They cannot shy away from this global challenge willingly and try their best to seek business opportunities to establish their dominant place in this ever-changing and always challenging open market. In such a competitive scenario, they have to compete with foreign companies. For example, if they decide to start a denim company, their competitors are likely to be multinational corporations such as Levis, Wrangler, Pepe etcetera. Indian entrepreneurs will have to improve in the areas of supply chain from sourcing to selling. Usage of improved technology, new methods of production and highly motivated manpower to overcome the competition is almost a necessity. c) Liberalization from 1991

The Government of India began liberalization process in the year 1991. With its initiation, private entrepreneurs were granted liberty to start any business in any domain except a few reserved sectors. This opened the proverbial ‘Pandora’s Box’ of new business opportunities for entrepreneurs. Now, the challenge before Indian entrepreneurs is how to take optimum advantage of these business opportunities. A rise in intense competition has made it difficult for both Indian and foreign companies. Indian entrepreneurs can beat this enormous competition by focusing more on selling high-quality and unique goods at the lowest prices possible.

143 d) Adapting Technology

With each passing day, the pace of development in Science and Technology is increasing rapidly. Modern technology improves quality of produced goods and services, helps to reduce their cost of production. It speeds up their process of production. High-quality commodities, lower cost of production and faster production rate makes any company a highly competitive one. So, it is always better to replace outdated technology with the new technology. Old machinery and equipment needs to be replaced by modern ones. This is a big challenge before an Indian entrepreneur firstly for finding the adequate financial back up and secondly to spend more on training the requisite man power to optimize the adopted technology and machinery. e) Changing the Demography of Indian Workforce

Off late the Indian workforce has undergone a remarkable change. Statistics indicate the dominance of men in the workforce is shrinking rapidly. Indian women have begun to enter the workforce in India in a big way in all the departments including even those which were traditionally reserved for males. Defeating all norms, they have established themselves as efficient employees and professional managers. This presence of women in the workforce has brought new challenges before the Indian entrepreneurs.

To comply with women's workforce-related challenges efficiently, entrepreneurs must know and follow all the special ‘Labour Laws’ for women. They have to make provisions for women staff with better working conditions, safe environment, and other essential facilities. Special care must be taken to see to it that they are treated with dignity and respect. Grievances or complaints regarding physical or mental harassment need to be addressed immediately. Working women experience more stress than their male counterparts as they perform dual duties on a day-to-day basis. To elaborate they have to manage their job requirements and family commitments with equal importance. This increase in their personal and job responsibilities are the root cause for their stress. To alleviate the stress, an employer can try to ease their stress by granting maternity leave, providing separate toilets and washrooms, implementing favorable work timings, providing a health insurance or at least a free routine medical checkup and so on,

Next on the agenda of entrepreneurs is efficient handling of young-generation in the workforce. Today, junior managers and workforce hired by most companies are young, energetic and ambitious graduates that have big dreams to accomplish. These managers work hard but expect a good reward in return which is satisfactory in terms of their monetary, physical and psychological needs. These

144 restless youngsters must be continuously motivated by keeping them engaged in challenging tasks and interesting work assignments, providing attractive salaries, incentives, perks or employee benefits, etc. If not, they will resign and leave the company and then join the competitors. f) Marketing

Marketing is a challenge before every Indian entrepreneur. To beat the competitive market there is a need to select an efficient and experienced marketing team and train and develop this team into a result-oriented one. To keep a motivated team, high salaries, attractive incentives and good commissions are fast becoming a requirement. Indian entrepreneur has to evaluate the market trends and consumer needs to satisfy the needs and expectations of his customers. Entrepreneurs have to believe in the adage that customer is the king and hence, aim to provide his customers full value for their money. g) Managing the Finance of Business

Funds management is the life line of any business. It can either make a business or break it. Under-capitalization and over-capitalization both are very harmful to the business. Managing the finance of his business is a big challenge for the entrepreneurs. Therefore, managing both fixed and working capital properly has become a necessity. He must borrow money from the right source and manage his ‘Cash Flow’ intelligently. He must create sufficient ‘Reserves’ and surpluses to provide cover for depreciation of fixed assets, so that they can be replaced when they become old and outdated. h) Challenges in the Field of Production

It is not just enough to start a production line but catering to the challenges in the field of production in order to include timely replacement of outdated plants and machineries with new modern ones, providing continuous training to their production staff, use good quality raw-materials to produce high quality finished goods, investing part of their profits for Research and Development (R & D) and Quality Control (QC) has become a necessity rather than an exception. i) Balancing Economic and Social Objectives

This includes planning for corporate social-welfare activities, use of modern machines without causing unemployment and harm to the environment, earn profit without reducing quality of their goods and services. Payment of all their taxes and duties on time and refraining from the use of unfair and unethical practices to fight cutthroat competition is also mandatory.

145 j) Logistics

Most courier companies deliver well in metros. However, beyond that the service is very poor and close follow-ups are needed to ensure on-time delivery. k) Infrastructure Challenges

With the exception of metros, the basic infrastructure facilities in other cities are inadequate. Long hours of load shedding related to power, inadequate telecom facilities etcetera hit the business hard. Nothing can be done but having patience and concentrating on dealing with other challenges in the meantime helps. l) Unrests

Bandhs are common in India, though they have been reduced quite a bit. It is also a hurdle in smooth operations. Rapid growth E-commerce has made life easier as they are open 24x7. m) Personal Challenges

No matter how well you do to cope with the challenges, it is sometimes very frustrating to be an owner of a start-up company. In the early stages, most of the time you have no profits and the only time you smile properly is when you don't have any payments overdue. It needs some time to adjust to that lifestyle. After that, there is a certain happiness inside you that keeps everyone around you happy. n) Convincing Family and Friends If you tell your parents that you are opting out of employment and would rather start something on your own, you should expect -"Are you mad?” Society believes that start-ups are a cover for being unemployed. Even if the start-up is fairly successful, most of the near and dear ones won't believe unless the venture is successful. It is hard to make your family and friends believe in you. o) Overnight Success is a Myth

There is no one customer or one big deal that can make you successful. They say overnight success is a result of years of hard work and very slow process. Every single day or deal is a one small step towards that objective. The overnight success is more a myth than a reality. p) Customers Customers can and will be over-demanding. They would ask for customizing the service or product as much as possible. While one consumer may want something

146 taller, other might demand smaller ones. The key to success is to address each customer individually. Even if you don't agree to their demands, few sweet words can do the trick. q) Too much to offer Most of the startups have too much to offer. They offer unique products and services and at times too many of them. The focus therefore should instead be more on visibility. Instead of launching a line of products at a time, first launch one unique product, make it known to a target consumer and create a brand value. Then use this platform to showcase products in the pipeline. r) Angel Investing Let us take a look at the main problems in investment. The angels in India are unwilling to take RISK; this is very harmful to any start up. The problem here is that people judge an idea by the balance sheet and 5 year projections and NOT by innovation and/or potential disruption of the market. What this leads to is not much innovation but more of copying of successful ideas from other markets in the name of being original. The scenario is fast changing, as a year ago, there were only a handful of accelerators in India of note. Today, there are over a dozen who are willing to provide more start up funding for lesser equity. Having seen the start ups throughout the spectrum, this means that a lot of generic ideas are being funded and the obstacles to starting a company are slowly being removed. Once the angel investment comes of age, there will be not much holding us back. s) End Consumers The problem with the Indian market is one of psyche and mentality. The Indian end consumer, more or less, is not ready to accept a new product unless it has been pre-validated, either by someone they trust or by a different market. This is where being in the wrong geographical locale is a major obstacle. In the end, entrepreneurs in India have to face these issues as given and find a solution to deal with them. You will get a valuation that is inadequate and your lead cycle will be longer.

Conclusion

The entrepreneurs and the entrepreneurship atmosphere determine the health of the economy of a nation. It is universally accepted that the start-ups have lesser challenges and conducive environment in developed nations. In developing countries, it’s a different scenario.

147 The dawn of 21st century has diminished the nation’s boundaries and brought the world much closer and hence we call it a large Global Village. As human race has begun to acknowledge that economic activity is the key to prospering, a new realization that everyone is needed in this development has brought in scope of more and more entrepreneurial enthusiasm. The so called developing countries have begun to narrow this gap in economic activities and the textiles and apparel industry leads the way in narrowing this gap.

Bibliography 1. Aditya Marwaha. (2008). Impact of China on Indian Garment Industry. Dissertation the University of Nottingham. 2. Deshpande P.P. (2009). Garment - Export Industry of India. APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi. 3. Dr. N. Santhi, and S. Rajesh Kumar. Entrepreneurship Challenges and Opportunities in India. T. Bonfring International Journal of Industrial Engineering and Management Science, Vol. 1, Special Issue, December 2011 15 ISSN 2250 – 1096. 4. Dr. T.S. Devaraja, Indian Textile and Garment Industry-An Overview*, Associate Professor, Department of Commerce, Post Graduate Centre, University of Mysore, Hassan, India. 5. Vijayabaskar, M. (2002). Garment Industry in South Asia-Rags or Riches -Competitiveness, productivity and job quality in the post-MFA environment 6. Vishal Jain, Indian entrepreneurship and the challenges to India’s growth Issues: September/October 2011. Categories: Global Business and International Business. 7. Nayak, P. (2008a). “Post-quota regime–The Help and the Hassles”, Modern Textiles, Vol. 3 No. 1, February–March, pp. 18-24. 8. ZENITH International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research. Year: 2012, Volume: 2, Issue : 5 First page : ( 62) Last page : (67) Print ISSN : 0000- 0000. Online ISSN: 2231-5780. 9. Entrepreneurship Challenges and Opportunities in India : http://www. journal.bonfring.org/papers/iems/volume1/BIJIEMS-01-1004.pdf. 10 A Study on “The Problems and Prospects about the Growth http:// theglobaljournals.com/gra/articles.php?val=ODg2&b1=221&k=56 11 http://auced.in/entrepreneurship-and-textile-technologists 12 http://www.quora.com/What-challenges-do-entrepreneurs-face-in-India 13 www.makeinindia.com/policies

148 Development and Validation of RP- HPLC Method for the Determination of Terbinafine Hydrochloride in a Tablet Dosage Form P. Ramya1 & D. Visagaperumal2

Abstract

A new isocratic reverse-phase HPLC method with photo diode array detector was developed and validated for the determination of Terbinafine Hydrochloride in tablet dosage forms. Chromatography

was carried out on Dionex C18 Acclaim120 (250×4.6 mm, 5 µ) column using Methanol:Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate pH 8.0 (60:40 v/v) as mobile phase at a flow rate of 1.0 ml/min. Detection was carried out at a wavelength of 225 nm. The retention time of Terbinafine Hydrochloride was found to be 4.18 min. The linearity was established over a concentration range of 0.01-0.04 mg/ml. The correlation coefficient (r2) was ≥ 0.9999. The relative standard deviation values for precision studies were <1%. The percentage recovery for Terbinafine Hydrochloride was found to be in the range of 99.3-100.6%. The statistical analysis of the data showed that the method was precise, accurate, reproducible and selective for the analysis of Terbinafine Hydrochloride. The method was successfully employed for the determination of Terbinafine Hydrochloride in commercially available tablet dosage forms.

Keywords: Terbinafine Hydrochloride, HPLC, Validation.

1. Department of Pharmaceutical Analysis and Quality Assurance, Bapatla College of Pharmacy, Guntur, Andhra Pradesh. 2. Associate Professor, Department of Pharmaceutical Chemistry, T. John College of Pharmacy.

149 Introduction Terbinafine(1-9) is a member of the allylamines class of Squalene Monooxygenase inhibitor used in the treatment of fungal infections. It is present as Hydrochloride salt. It is chemically(4) designated as (E)-N-(6,6-dimethyl-2-hepten-4-ynyl)-N-methyl- 1-naphthalene methanamine monohydrochloride (fig.1) with a molecular weight of

327.90 g/mol. The empirical formula is C21H25N.HCl. It is a white fine cyrstalline powder and it is freely soluble in Methanol and slightly soluble in water at 25°C. Terbinafine(6) is hypothesized to act by inhibiting squalene monooxygenase, thus blocking the biosynthesis of ergosterol, an essential component of fungal cell membranes. This inhibition also results in an accumulation of squalene which is a substrate catalyzed to 2, 3-oxydo squalene by squalene monooxygenase. The resultant high concentration of squalene and decreased amount of ergosterol are both thought to contribute to terbinafine's antifungal activity.

Fig. 1 Structure of Terbinafine Hydrochloride

Terbinafine Hydrochloride is official in United States Pharmacopoeia and British Pharmacopoeia. It is available as tablet with a dosage strength of 250 mg (Sebifin). Literature survey(10-11) revealed that few UV methods, LC methods with mass spectrophotometry and bioanalytical methods were reported for the analysis of Terbinafine Hydrochloride in pure form and its related substances. However, an RP-HPLC method employing PDA detector has not been developed for pharmaceutical dosage forms. So an RP-HPLC method was developed and validated for linearity, accuracy, precision, robustness, and specificity, limit of detection and limit of quantification.

Materials and Method:

Terbinafine Hydrochloride Pure was manufactured by Dr. Reddy’s Laboratory, Hyderabad, Telengana and Andhra Pradesh, India. SEBIFIN(8) tablets (each tablet

150 containing Terbinafine Hydrochloride equivalent to 250 mg Terbinafine) was manufactured by RANBAXY Pharmaceuticals (INDIA) PVT. LTD. and were purchased from the local market. Acetonitrile and Methanol were of HPLC grade and collected from E. Merck, Darmstadt, Germany. Dipotassium hydrogen phosphate was an analytical reagent grade supplied by Fischer Scientific Chemicals. Water of HPLC grade was obtained from a Milli-Q water purification system. Waters e2695Alliance HPLC system equipped with online degasser and model 2998 photodiode array detector was used. The data was acquired through

Empower2 data acquisition software. Dionex C18 Acclaim 120 (250×4.6 mm, 5 µ particle size) was used. The mobile phase with a mixture of Methanol:0.01 M Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate pH 8.0 (60:40, v/v) was prepared and filtered through 0.45 µ membrane filter and degassed in ultrasonic water bath and injected at a flow rate of 1.0 ml/min. The injection volume is 20 µl and detection was carried out at a wavelength of 225 nm. Reverse-phase HPLC analysis was carried out isocratically at ambient temperature. Buffer was prepared by accurately weighing 1.5146 g of Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate in a 1000 ml volumetric flask and diluted in volume with water.

Standard preparation: 25 mg Terbinafine Hydrochloride was taken in 100 ml volumetric flask and dissolved in 50 ml of methanol and sonicated for 15 min and make up the volume to 100 ml to get the stock solution. Then 10 ml aliquot of stock solution was transferred in a 100 ml volumetric flask and make up the volume with diluent yielding a final concentration of 25 ppm.

Sample preparation: The equivalent weight of finely powdered tablets containing 25 mg of Terbinafine Hydrochloride are taken in a 100 ml volumetric flask, 50 ml of diluent was added and sonicated for 10 min and then make up the volume with diluent. The supernatant liquid is filtered through 0.45 µm filter. 10 ml of this solution was transferred to 100 ml volumetric flask and diluted with methanol to the mark yielding a final concentration of 25 ppm of Terbinafine Hydrochloride and 20 µl was injected in to the chromatographic systems.

Results and Discussions:

The procedure for the analysis of Terbinafine Hydrochloride using photodiode array detector is reported. The mobile phase is chosen after several trails with methanol, water, acetonitrile and buffer in various compositions and at different

151 pH values. The mobile phase consisting of a mixture of Methanol: 0.01 M Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate (pH 8.0 phosphate buffer) (60:40, v/v) was proved to be most suitable for estimation. Since the chromatographic peaks are better defined, resolved with this system under above mentioned chromatographic conditions, the retention time obtained for Terbinafine Hydrochloride was 4.18 min (fig 2). The method was validated for accuracy, precision, linearity, specificity and robustness as per ICH guidelines.

Fig. 2 Standard Chromatogram of Terbinafine Hydrochloride System suitability was evaluated by injecting a solution of Terbinafine Hydrochloride at 100% concentration in five replicates at the beginning of the validation run. System suitability parameters calculated from the chromatogram (fig 3) such as tailing factor (T), theoretical plates (N) and percentage relative standard deviation (% RSD) of peak areas are given in table 1. The obtained values of these parameters (T≤2, N>2000) show that the proposed chromatographic conditions are suitable for separation of the drug. Table 1: Summary of System Suitability Test Parameters

S. No. PARAMETERS TERBINAFINE HYDROCHLORIDE 1. Retention Time (min) 4.18 2. Tailing Factor 1.06 3. Theoretical Plates 6240

152

Fig. 3 Chromatogram of Terbinafine Hydrochloride in Tablet Formulation The precision of the test method was demonstrated by system precision and method precision. The system precision studies were carried out by injecting five repeated injections of standard solution of 100% concentration on the same day by one analyst under the same experimental conditions. The % RSD value for peak areas was found to be 0.34 for Terbinafine Hydrochloride. Method precision was carried out by injecting six replicates of freshly prepared 100% solutions. The RSD value obtained for peak areas was 0.21, which illustrated good precision of this analytical method. Robustness verification studies were also performed in the method development phase. Robustness of the analytical method is defined as the measure of its capacity to remain unaffected by small but deliberate variations in method parameters and provides an indication of its reliability under normal usage. One way to gauge robustness is to examine some relevant factors which might influence the reliability of the developed method. Selected factors namely the flow rate (±0.2), temperature (±5) and pH(±0.2) were investigated indicating that the analytical method remained selective and robust under optimized conditions.

153 The linear working range was selected depending on the nature of application. Linearity test solutions were prepared by diluting the stock solution at five concentration levels. The solutions were injected and curves were obtained by plotting peak area against concentration of the drugs. Linear calibration curves were generated using least square regression analysis. The calibration graphs yielded the following equations: y=1784X-161. An excellent correlation exists between peak areas and concentrations. Results are shown in table 2.

Table 2: Linear Regression Data for Calibration Curves TERBINAFINE HYDRO- S. No. PARAMETERS CHLORIDE 1. Linearity range (mg/ml) 0.01-0.04 2. Correlation coefficient 0.999 3. Slope 1784 4. Intercept -161

The accuracy of an analytical method is determined by how close the test results obtained by that method come to the true value. It can be obtained by recovery studies where a known amount of standard is spiked in the placebo. In the present study, a number of different solutions of 50, 100 and 150% of tablet formulation were prepared with a known added amount of a standard and injected in triplicate (n=3). Percent recoveries of response factor calculated ranged from 99.3% to100.6% which indicated the accuracy of the method was accurate within the desired range and the results are shown in table 3. Table 3: Accuracy Data of Terbinafine Hydrochloride Amount Amount % Recov- Statistical Concentration Added Found ery Analysis (µg) (µg) 50% Sample 1 12.463 12.472 100.4 Mean = 100.64 50% Sample 2 12.524 12.594 101.1 SD = 0.347 50% Sample 3 12.467 12.502 100.21 %RSD = 0.34 100% Sample 1 25.049 25.02 100 Mean= 100.28 100% Sample 2 25.087 25.047 100 SD = 0.362 100% Sample 3 24.987 25.051 99.91 %RSD= 0.315

154 150% Sample 1 37.428 37.519 99.92 Mean = 99.89 150%Sample 2 37.512 37.470 99 SD = 0.216 150% Sample 3 37.40 37.361 99.4 %RSD = 0.2 SD stands for standard deviation, RSD stands for relative standard deviation.

By evaluating specificity, the ability of an analytical method to unequivocally assess the analyte in presence of other components (impurities, degradations, excipients) in the formulation can be demonstrated. The specificity of the method was determined by injecting placebo solution (mixture of excipients), diluents used for the preparation of standard and sample solution in to the chromatographic system and checked for interference at retention time corresponding to the retention time of Terbinafine Hydrochloride and the results demonstrate that there was no interference from other compounds.

The limit of detection (LOD) and limit of quantitation (LOQ) were determined by the calibration plot method. The values of LOD and LOQ are 0.883µg/ml and 1.945µg/ml respectively. Results obtained indicate the method is sensitive enough. All the validation results are shown in table 4. Table 4: Summary on Validation Results TERBINAFINE HYDRO- S. No. PARAMETERS CHLORIDE 1. Linearity range (mg/ml) 0.01-0.04 2. Correlation Coefficient 0.999 3. Recovery (%) 99.3-100.6% 4. Precision (%RSD) 0.34 5. LOD (µg/ml) 0.883 6. LOQ (µg/ml) 1.945

RSD is relative standard deviation, LOD is limit of detection, LOQ is limit of quantification.

In the present study an attempt has been made to develop simple, sensitive, accurate HPLC method for the estimation of Terbinafine Hydrochloride. The proposed method for determination of Terbinafine Hydrochloride from oral dosage form is specific, accurate, precise and rapid. It can be used for routine quality control analysis.

155 References 1. http://www.drugbank.ca/drugsDB00857, assessed 06.03.2012. 2. http://structures.wishatlab.com/molecules/DB00857/image.png, assessed on 06.03.2012. 3. http://www.springerlink.com/content/u25228115n02nv3p/, assessed on 18.03.2012. 4. http://resources.metapress.com/pdfpreview.axd/, assessed on 18.03.2012. 5. http://dailymed.nlm.nih.gov/dailymed/druginfo. cfm?id=50837nlm34090-1, assessed on 06.03.2012. 6. http://drugs.com/monograph/terbinafine-hydrochloride.html, assessed on 06.03.2012. 7. http://skinemedtv.com/terbinafine/side-effects-of-terbinafine.html, assessed on 07.03.2012. 8. http://www.medindia.net/drug-price/terbinafine.htm, assessed on 03.06.2012. 9. http://www.drugsupdate.com/generic/view/508, assessed on 11.03.2012. 10. L. Loukas, Yannis Dotsikas, Constantinos Apostolou, Constantinos Kousoulos, Georgia Tsatsou, & Yannis. (2007). An improved high- throughput liquid chromatographic/tandem mass spectrometric method for terbinafine quantification in human plasma, using automated liquid–liquid extraction based on 96-well format plates. Biomedical Chromatography. 21(2):201–208. 11. Tina Kotnik, Nevenka Kozuh Erzen, Jernej Kuzner, & Marinka Drobnic Kosorok. (2001). Study of the treatment of Microsporum canis experimentally- induced ringworm in cats by Terbinafine hydrochloride by analyzing cat’s plasma and hair with RP-HPLC method. Veterinary Microbiology. 83(2), 161-168.

12. Irena Baranowska, Andrzej Wilczek, and Jacek Baranowski. (2010). Rapid UHPLC method for Simultaneous determination of Vancomycin, Terbinafine, Spironolactone, Furosemide and their metabolites: application to human plasma and urine. Analytical Sciences. 26: 755-759.

13. L. Matysova, P. Solich, P. Marek, L. Havlikova, L. Novakova, & J. Sicha. (2006). An analytical method for the separation and determination of terbinafine and its four impurities of similar structure using simple RP-HPLC method. National centre for Biotechnology Information. 68(3): 13-20.

156 14. Non aqueous RP-HPLC determination of Terbinafine hydrochloride and its related, substances, Quality Control of Traditional Chinese Medicine (China Paper), 14 April 2010.

15. Marinela Flora, Corina Cristina Arama, & Crina Maria Monciu. (2009). An analytical method for the determination of Terbinafine Hydrochloride by Ion-Pair Reversed Phase Liquid Chromatography (IP-RP-HPLC). Farmacia. 7(1): 83-89

16. S. G. Cardoso, & E. E. Schapoval. (2009). UV spectrophotometry and non aqueous determination of terbinafine hydrochloride in dosage forms. Journal of AOAC International. 82(4): 830-833.

157 Development and Validation of RP-HPLC Method for the Determination of Amlodipine and Indapamide in a Tablet Dosage Form P. Shulamite Vatsalya1 & D. Visagaperumal2

Abstract

A new isocratic reverse-phase HPLC method with photo diode array detector was developed and validated for the determination of Amlodipine and Indapamide in the tablet dosage forms. Chromatography was carried out on Develosil ODS-UG (150×4.6mm, 5µ) column using Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate (pH 8.0): methanol (50:50, v/v) as mobile phase at a flow rate of 1.2 ml/min. Detection was carried out at a wavelength of 292 nm. The retention times of Amlodipine and Indapamide were found to be 2.88 and 3.83 respectively. The linearity was established over a concentration range of 0.1-0.3 mg/ml for amlodipine and 0.03-0.1 mg/ml for Indapamide. The correlation coefficients (r2) are ≥ 0.999 in each case. The relative standard deviation values for precisional studies are ˂ 1%. The percentage recoveries for Amlodipine and Indapamide were found to be in the range of 99.3-100% and 99-99.3% respectively. The statistical analysis of the data showed that the method was precise, accurate, reproducible and selective for the analysis of Amlodipine and Indapamide drugs. The method was successfully employed for the determination of Amlodipine and Indapamide in commercially available dosage forms.

Keywords: Amlodipine, Indapamide, HPLC, Validation.

1. Department of Pharmaceutical Analysis and Quality Assurance, Bapatla College, Guntur, Andhra Pradesh. 2. Associate Professor, Department of Pharmaceutical Chemistry, T. John College of Pharmacy.

158 Introduction Amlodipine (1-5) is a dihydropyridine calcium antagonist or calcium channel blocker, as the active ingredient. It is chemically designated as 2-[(2-aminoethoxy)-4-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-ethoxycarbonyl-6-methyl- 1,4-dihydropyridine benzenesulphonate (fig.1). The empirical formula is

C20H25ClN2O5. C6H6O3S, representing a molecular weight of 567.05 g/mol. Amlodipine is a white crystalline powder freely soluble in methanol. It decreases arterial smooth muscle contractility and subsequent vasoconstriction by inhibiting the influx of calcium ions through L-type calcium channels and thus causes muscle contraction. Inhibition of the initial influx of calcium decreases the contractile activity of arterial smooth muscle cells and results in vasodilation. Its available tablet dosage forms are 2.5 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg (Norvosac 2.5 mg).

Fig .1 Structure of Amlodipine Indapamide(6-11) is a thiazide diuretic drug. It is chemically designated as benzamide,3-(aminosulfonyl)-4-chloro-N-(2,3-dihydro-2-methyl-1H-indol-1-yl]-

4-chloro-N-(2-methyl-1-indolinyl) (fig.2). Its empirical formula is C16H16ClN3O3S, representing a molecular weight of 365.84. Indapamide is a yellow-white crystalline powder soluble in methanol. It is used in the treatment of hypertension as well as decompensates cardiac failure. It acts by inhibiting transmembrane ionic influx and stimulating synthesis of the vasodilatory hypotensive prostaglandin PGE2. At doses above 2.5 mg/day the diuretic action of indapamide predominates. It is available as tablets of 2.5 mg (Natrilax 2.5 mg).

Fig .2 Structure of Indapamide

159 Amlodipine is official in Indian pharmacopeia and Indapamide is official in United States pharmacopeia and British pharmacopeia. Literature survey reveals that many analytical methods are reported for determination of Amlodipine (12-20) and Indapamide (21-24) as individual drugs and in combination with other drugs. However, RP-HPLC method employing UV visible detection has been reported in the combination of other hypotensive drugs. So an RP-HPLC method was developed and validated for linearity, precision, accuracy, robustness, limit of detection and limit of quantification with combined dosage form of Amlodipine and Indapamide in combined dosage form.

Materials and Method: Pure Amlodipine and Indapamide were procured as gift samples by Dr. Reddys Laboratory, Hyderabad, Telengana and Andhra Pradesh, India. NATRILAM tablets (containing Amlodipine 5 mg and Indapamide 1.5 mg per tablet) were manufactured by SERDIA Pharmaceuticals (INDIA) PVT. LTD. and were purchased from the `local market. Acetonitrile and Methanol were of HPLC grade and collected from E. Merck, Darmstadt, Germany. Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate was an analytical reagent grade supplied by Fischer Scientific Chemicals. Water of HPLC grade was obtained from a Milli-Q water purification system.

Waters e2695 Alliance HPLC system equipped with online degasser and model 2998 photodiode array detector was used. The data was acquired through Empower2 data acquisition software. Develosil ODS-UG (159×4.6 mm, 5 µ particle size) was used. The mobile phase with a mixture of 0.1 M Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate (pH 8.0) –methanol (50:50, v/v) was prepared and filtered through 0.45 µ membrane filter and degassed in ultrasonic water bath and injected at a flow rate of 1.2 ml/min. The injection volume is 10 µl and detection was carried out at a wavelength of 292 nm. Reverse-phase HPLC analysis was carried out isocratically at ambient temperature. Buffer was prepared by accurately weighing 17.418 g of Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate in a 1000 ml volumetric flask and diluted in volume with water.

Standard Preparation:

50 mg Amlodipine and 15 mg Indapamide was taken in 100 ml volumetric flask and dissolved in 50 ml of methanol and sonicated for 10 mins and make up the volume to 100 ml to get the stock solution. Then 5ml aliquot of stock solution was transferred in a 10 ml volumetric flask and make up the volume with diluent yielding a final concentration of 250 ppm and 75 ppm of Amlodipine and Indapamide respectively.

160 Sample Preparation:

The equivalent weight of finely powdered tablets containing 50 mg of Amlodipine and 15 mg of Indapamide are taken in a 100ml volumetric flask, 50 ml of diluent was added and sonicated for 10 mins and then make up the volume with diluent. The supernatant liquid is filtered through 0.45 µm filter. Five ml of this solution was transferred to 10 ml volumetric flask and diluted with methanol to the mark, yielding a final concentration of 250 ppm and 75 ppm of Amlodipine and Indapamide respectively and 10 µl was injected in to the chromatographic systems. Results and Discussions:

The procedure for simultaneous analysis of Amlodipine and Indapamide using photodiode array detector is reported. The mobile phase is chosen after several trails with methanol, water, acetonitrile and buffer in various compositions and at different pH values. The mobile phase consisting of a mixture of Dipotassium Hydrogen Phosphate (pH 8.0) and methanol in ratio of (50:50, v/v) was proved to be most suitable for estimation. Since the chromatographic peaks are better defined, resolved and free from tailing with this system under above mentioned chromatographic conditions, the retention times obtained for Amlodipine and Indapamide are 2.88 and 3.83 mins respectively (fig 3). The method was validated for accuracy, precision, linearity, specificity and robustness as per ICH guidelines.

161 Fig. 3 Standard Chromatogram of Amlodipine and Indapamide

System suitability testing verifies that the HPLC system is working as expected. It is based on the concept that the equipment, electronics, analytical operations and samples to be analyzed constitute an integral system. System suitability was evaluated by injecting a solution of Amlodipine and Indapamide drugs at 100% concentration in five replicates at the beginning of the validation run. System suitability parameters calculated from the chromatogram (fig 4) such as tailing factor (T), resolution factor (Rs), theoretical plates (N) and percentage relative standard deviation (% RSD) of peak areas are given in table 1. The obtained values of these parameters (T≤2, Rs>2, N>2000) show that the proposed chromatographic conditions are suitable for separation of the analyzed drug components.

Fig. 4 Chromatogram of Amlodipine and Indapamide in Formulation

162 Table 1: Summary of System Suitability Test Parameters

S. No. PARAMETERS AMLODIPINE INDAPAMIDE 1. Retention Time 2.888 3.835 2. Resolution - 5.03 3. Tailing Factor 1.0 0.9 4. Theoretical Plates 5889 6638

The precision of the test method was demonstrated by system precision and method precision. The system precision studies were carried out by injecting five repeated injections of standard solution of 100% concentration on the same day, by one analyst under the same experimental conditions. The % RSD values for peak areas are found to be 0.3% and 0.2% for Amlodipine and Indapamide respectively.

Method precision was carried out by injecting six replicates of freshly prepared 100% solutions. The precision was calculated as: % RSD = (SD/Mean×100). The RSD values obtained for the peak area in both cases is < 1% and met the precision criteria (RSD ≤ 2%) which illustrated good precision of this analytical method.

Robustness verification studies were also performed in the method development phase. Robustness of the analytical method is defined as the measure of its capacity to remain unaffected by small but deliberate variations in method parameters and provides an indication of its reliability under normal usage. One way to gauge robustness is to examine some relevant factors which might influence the reliability of the developed method. Selected factors namely the flow rate (±0.2) and temperature (±5) are investigated. In all the cases, good separation of both the drug components were always achieved, indicating that the analytical method remained selective and robust under optimized conditions.

The linear working range was selected depending on the nature of application. Linearity test solutions are prepared by diluting the stock solution at five concentration levels from 0.1-0.3 mg/ml for Amlodipine and 0.03-0.1 mg/ ml for Indapamide. The solutions are injected and curves were obtained by plotting peak area against concentration of the drugs. Linear calibration curves were generated using least square regression analysis. The calibration graphs yielded the following equations: y=4728.x-1168 (r2=0.999) for Amlodipine and y=4639.x-816.4 (r2=0.999). An excellent correlation exists between peak areas and concentration of Amlodipine and Indapamide drugs. Results are shown in table 2.

163 Table 2: Linear Regression Data for Calibration Curves

S. No. PARAMETERS AMLODIPINE INDAPAMIDE 1. Linearity Range mg/ml 0.1-0.3 0.03-0.1 2. Correlation Coefficient 0.999 0.999 3. Slope 4728 4639 4. Intercept -1168 -816.4

The accuracy of an analytical method is determined by how close the test results obtained by that method come to the true value. It can be obtained by application of analytical procedures to analyte of known purity (drug substance) or by recovery studies where a known amount of standard is spiked in the placebo. In the present study, a number of different solutions of 50, 100 and 150% of Amlodipine and Indapamide are prepared with a known added amount of a standard and injected in triplicate (n=3). Percent recoveries of response factor calculated ranged from 99.1% to 100.2% which indicated the accuracy of the method was accurate within the desired range and the results are shown in table 3 and 4. Table 3: Data on Accuracy of Amlodipine

Amount Amount Statistical Concentration Added (µg) Found (µg) % Recovery Analysis 50% Sample 1 124.7 124.2 100.4 Mean = 100.2 50% Sample 2 124.7 124.5 99.8 SD = 0.02 50% Sample 3 124.7 124.2 100.4 %RSD = 0.001 100% Sample 1 249.5 248.6 99.6 Mean= 100.28 100% Sample 2 249.5 248.6 99.6 SD = 0.384 100% Sample 3 249.5 247.6 99.2 %RSD= 0.383 150% Sample 1 374.2 370.7 99 Mean = 99.1 150 %Sample 2 374.2 370.6 99 SD = 0.1 150% Sample 3 374.2 372.3 99.4 %RSD = 0.1

Table 4: Data on Accuracy of Indapamide Amount Amount % Recov- Statistical Concentration Added (µg) Found (µg) ery Analysis 50% Sample 1 37.4 37.4 100 Mean= 100.2 50% Sample 2 37.4 37.4 100 SD= 0.02 50% Sample 3 37.4 37.6 100.5 %RSD= 0.001

164 100% Sample 1 74.8 74.8 100 Mean= 99.9 100% Sample 2 74.8 74.7 99.8 SD = 0.09 100% Sample 3 74.8 74.8 100 %RSD= 0.09 150% Sample 1 112.2 112.4 100.1 Mean= 100 150 %Sample 2 112.2 112.2 100 SD= 0.08 150% Sample 3 112.2 112.1 99.9 %RSD= 0.08

The ability of an analytical method to unequivocally asses the analyte in presence of other components (impurities, degradations, excipients) in the formulation can be demonstrated by evaluating specificity. The specificity of the method was determined by injecting placebo solution (mixture of excipients), diluents used for the preparation of standard and sample solution in to the chromatographic system and checked for interference at retention time corresponding to the retention time of Amlodipine and Indapamide and the results demonstrate that there was no interference from other compounds and demonstrate the specificity of compound.

The limit of detection (LOD) and limit of quantitation (LOQ) were determined by the calibration plot method. The values of LOD are 0.9 µg/ml and 0.8 µg/ ml and LOQ are 2.9 µg/ml and 2.4 µg/ml for Amlodipine and Indapamide, respectively. LOD and LOQ are calculated by using the equations: LOD=Cd× Syx/b and LOQ= Cq× Syx/b where Cd and Cq are coefficients of LOD and LOQ and Syx is the residual variance of the regression and b is the slope. Calculations are performed by using values of Cd and Cq as 3.3 and 10 respectively. Results obtained indicate the sensitivity of the method is adequate. All the validation results are shown in table 5. Table 5: Summary on Validation Results

S. No. PARAMETERS AMLODIPINE INDAPAMIDE 1. Linearity Range (mg/ml) 0.1-0.3 0.03-0.1 2. Correlation Coefficient 0.999 0.999 3. Recovery (%) 99.1-100.2% 99.9-100.1% 4. Precision (% RSD) 0.3 0.2 5. LOD µg/ml 0.9 0.8 6. LOQ µg/ml 2.909 2.443

In the present study, an attempt has been made to develop simple, sensitive, accurate HPLC method for the simultaneous estimation of Amlodipine and

165 Indapamide. The proposed method for determination of Amlodipine and Indapamide from oral dosage form is specific, accurate, precise and rapid. It can be used for routine quality control analysis of oral dosage form containing Amlodipine and Indapamide.

References 1. Indian Pharmacopoeia, Volume-II, 2007, the Indian Pharmacopoeia Commission, Ghaziabad, Govt. of India, Ministry of Health and Family welfare, pg. 714-6. 2. Indian Pharmacopoeia, Volume-II, 2010, the Indian Pharmacopoeia Commission, Ghaziabad, Govt. of India, Ministry of Health and Family welfare, pg. 148. 3. Dailymed.nlm.nih.gov/daily med/archives/fda Drug Info. chem. 4. www.rxlist.com/norvasc-drug.htm, referred date 1-11-2011. 5. www.medicinet.com/amlodipine, referred date 10-11-2012. 6. Indian Pharmacopoeia, Volume-II, 2010, the Indian Pharmacopoeia Commission, Ghaziabad, Govt. of India, Ministry of Health and Family welfare, pg. 158,1489. 7. United State pharmacopoeia, 30-National formulary25. 8. www.drugs update.com/generics/view/231, referred on 1-12-2011. 9. www.medicinet.com/indapamide/article.htm, referred on 5-12-2011. 10. www.pharmacy.utah.edu/pharmaceutics/pdf/salt.pdf-us, referred 10-12- 2011. 11. www.authostream.com/presentation/asguest 124197-1305824, referred on 20-12-2011. 12. Amit Amin, & Mrs. Nisha Parikh. (2012) Simultaneous estimation of Amlodipine and Indapamide in combined dosage form using derivative spectrophotometric method International Journal of Pharmaceutical Research and Biosciences. 1(3): 204-19. 13. Sharma, D., Jain, A., & Shrivastav, A. (2011). Simultaneous estimation of Amlodipine besylate and Nebivolol hydrochloride in tablet forms by RP-HPLC using ultraviolet detection. Pharma methods. 2(1): 9-14. 14. Shaalan, R. A., & Belal, T. S. (2010). Simultaneous estimation of Amlodipine besylate and Valsartan in their combined tablets. Drug Test Anal. 2(10): 489-93.

166 15. Mallikarjuna Rao, N., & Gowrisankar, D. (2011). International Journal of Pharma and Pharma Science Research. 1(1):1-5.

16. Barman, R. T., Islam, M. A., Ahmed, M., Washed, M. I. I., Islam, R., Khan, A., Hossain, M. B., & Rahman, B. M. (2007). Simultaneous high performance liquid chromatographic determination of Atenolol and Amlodipine in pharmaceutical dosage form. Pak J Pharma Sci 20(4): 274-9.

17. Dhandapani, B., Anjaneyulul, N., Venkateshwarulu, Y., and Rasheed, S. H. (2010). HPTLC method development and validation for the simultaneous estimation of Amlodipine besylate and Nebivolol hydrochloride in tablet dosage form. Journal of Pharmacy Research 3(2): 332-4.

18. Prasad Rao, C. H. M. M., Rahaman, S. A., Rangjendhera Prasad, Y., & Ganga Reddy, P. (2010). RP-HPLC method of simultaneous estimation of Amlodipine besylate and Metaprolol in combined dosage form. Int J Pharma Res Dev 2 (9): 69-76.

19. Chitlange, S. S., Kiran, Bagri, & Sankarkar, D. M. (2008). Stability indicating RP-HPLC method for simultaneous estimation of Valsartan and Amlodipine in capsule formulation. Asain J Research Chem 1(1): 15-18.

20. Devi Ramseh, and Ramakrishna S. (2010). New spectrophotometric methods for simultaneous determination of Amlodipine besylate and Atorvastatin calcium in tablet dosage form. Int Pharm Sci; 2 (4): 215-9.

21. Pawar, P. V., Gaikwad, P. D., Bankar, V. H., & Pawar, S. P. (2010). Development and Validation of UV spectrophotometric method for simultaneous estimation of Atenolol and Indapamide in bulk and tablet dosage form. Int J Pharma Tec 2 (4): 876-85.

22. Neha Manish Mount, Minal Rushikesh Ghante, Asmita Shripad Deshpande, & Preeti Vinod Gaikwad. (2010). Development and Validation of RP-HPLC method for simultaneous estimation of Amlodipine and Indapamide and Telmisartan. J Pharma Res; 3(12): 2941-3.

23. Tushor, G. B., Vipul Prajapati, Dr. Patel P. K., Niraj Shah, Dr. Patel L. D. (2009). A validated RP-HPLC method for simultaneous estimation of Indapamide impurity (methyl nitro indole) API form. Int J Pharma Tech Res 1(4): 1287- 96.

24. Mohit G. D., Kailash G. B., Ashwini R. M., & Mrinalini C. D. (2011). Simultaneous estimation of Perindopril erbium and Indapamide in bulk drug and tablet dosage form by HPTLC. Int J Com Pharma; 2(1): 1-4.

167 Emerging Trend in Technical Textile- Application of Optical Fiber Fabric in Present Fashion Trend Tejashvi V.1 & Hemalatha I. Doddamani2

Abstract

A few years ago the technical textile and the smart textile came into force. But it is playing an important role in today’s world. The application possibilities are still limited by our imagination and creativity. Hence, it is not simple to access it and get used to it in the developing countries like India. Luminous Optical Fibre Fabric (light up) clothing is for all the clubbers, partygoers and factionist as who want to stand out with the help of stylish and innovative fashion. Luminous Optical Fabric’s illuminated outfits are also a great idea for special events, for stage performers and for all those who want to make the ultimate fashion statement. The high tech, sexy, never seen before, beautiful, magical, use of Luminous Optical Fabric in clothing line is all this and much more. The concept of light up clothing line is mainly achieved by use of optical fiber. The fiber optic fabric emits a colored light along the full length of the fibers, producing a stunning luminous effect. Unlike other light sources like neon, LEDs or electroluminescence the light coming from the fiber optic fabric is subtle and mysterious, producing a beautiful and dazzling luminous effect in darkness.

Keywords: Optical Fiber, Total Internal Reflection, Luminous Optical Fabric, Sky texture.

1. Designer, Zovi.com 2. Assistant Professor, Department of Fashion and Apparel Design, T. John College.

168 Introduction

An optical fibre is a flexible, transparent fibre made by drawing glass or plastic to a diameter slightly thicker than that of a human hair. The optical fibres are used most often as a means to transmit light between the two ends of the fibre.

The optical fibres typically include a transparent core surrounded by a transparent cladding material with a lower index of refraction. The light is kept in the core by the phenomenon of total internal reflection which causes the fibre to light up along the full length.

The textile has always been one of the indispensable items of our lives. The concept of design was always there. Then, technology was involved and eventually came the mass production. With the inclusion of synthetic raw materials in the textile world, vision of design expanded beyond dreams and now ‘Fibre Optics’ have been introduced to us. With the use of ‘Fibre Optics’ the engineers and designers have come up with quite creative ideas of modifying our daily lives by integrating them into a woven fabric. It’s doubtlessly fascinating that the usage of this facility revealed the possibility of telemedicine which suggests monitoring and treatment of humans those who are in the post-operative recovery state, geriatric patients, mentally ill patients, children susceptible to sudden infant death syndrome and individuals prone to allergic reactions and these are just a few of the obvious examples. The army, the police departments and the fire Departments will also be capable of monitoring their staff during a healthcare situation. Another major consequence of this new invention is of course its commercial side. Wouldn’t it be great if you possessed an armchair that glows at night and you could change its colour within seconds or a table cloth, a cushion, a curtain, a panel, a rug or even an umbrella with the same qualities? Maybe you would like to wear garments or use a backpack of that kind on which you can display constantly changing colours and images. And these bring to the mind the fact that the advertisement and the entertainment sectors will also be one of the sectors to benefit from this innovation.

Luminous Optical Fabric:

The luminous fibre optical fabric is a fabric that literally lights up (light emitting fabric / illuminated fabric). It is made of ultra–thin optical fibres directly woven with synthetic fibres. The optical fibres are especially proceeded in order to allow the light to be connected at the edge of the fabric to ultra-bright LEDS which are injected into the fabric. The light is distributed evenly across the entire surface of the fabric, resulting in a self illumining textile.

169 The resulting fabric is unique, providing an elegant lighting all over its surface with a distinctive starry sky texture.

Characteristics of the Luminous Optical Fabric:

Flexible, fast, light weight, does not heat up, water resistant, washable and consumes little power to make the entire fabric glow. Application of the Luminous Optical Fabric in Emerging Textiles Trend:

This luminous fabric based on fibre optics emits a coloured light along the full length of the fibres producing a stunning luminous effect.

Unlike other light sources like Neon, LEDs or electroluminescence the light coming from the luminous fabric is subtle and mysterious allowing to create amazing, stylish and wonderfully original fashion accessories and decoration items.

Fig: 1 Fig: 2 Fig: 1 - Panels of Fibre Optics Fabric with single side wiring and double side wiring with a light injection. Fig: 2 - Different ways of cutting the panels without affecting the lighting effect.

170 Material and Method:

Battery powered, RGB light bulb, controller with senor, senor remote, luminous optical fibre fabric.

The luminous optical fabric fibre is connected to RGB light bulb at the edges. RGB light is connected to it with a battery through the control box. The control box is connected in between the light and the battery which helps in controlling the colour of the light which is to be lighted up according to the user instructions through the wireless senor remote.

Conclusion:

In conclusion, as long as the interactivity between design, technology and manufacturing develops gradually by the desire to design which is the major fact that pushes technology onwards we can be sure that such breakthroughs will not only expedite our lives but also play a vital role in our existence.

References

Website:

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Optical_fiber

2. http://www.midlightsun.com/luminous-fabric-157-en-us.html

3. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3862154/

4. http://www.wobook.com/WBcJ6Oq3Lp4p

5. http://sensingtex.com/luminous-tex

6. https://www.microwear.com.au/eureka/products/fibre-optic-fabric

Books: 1. Barolet, Daniel. (2008). Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) in Dermatology. Elsevier Inc. Retrieved from doi: 10.1016/j.sder.2008.08.003

2. X. M. Tao. (2001) Smart Fibres, Fabrics and Clothing. New York: CRC Press.

171 3. Rantanen, J., Impio, J., Karinsalo, T., Malmivaara, M., Reho, A., Tasanen, M., & Vanhala, J. (2002). Smart Clothing Prototype for the Arctic Environment. Personal and Ubiquitous Computing. Retrieved from doi>10.1007/ s007790200001

4. El-Sherif, M. (2004). Smart fabrics: Integrating fiber optic sensors and information networks. Stud Health Technol Inform. Retrieved from http:// www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/15718661.

172 Digital India – A Unique Identity Jayaprabha M.1 & Felcy Judith2

Abstract

India is a growing and diverse country. Currently, India is facing many challenges in various fields like improving technology, medicine, agriculture, education science and many more. One of the important motives is to take India to the next higher level. So a concept of Digital India was introduced to improve literacy, economy and make an integrated One India digitally. India is rich in human resources and Digital India bridges the gap between people and technology. It improves the rural citizens to be digitally literate. One India plan can be formed by providing a unique ID (UID) to all citizens of India. This UID will provide accountability and transparency to enjoy the social security benefits provided by the government. To overcome these challenges a 12 digit UIDAI (Unique Identification Authority of India) has been introduced as AADHAR Card. Collaboration between the latest biometric, cloud computing, encryption and search capabilities are merged to ensure every resident is issued a unique ID and no resident receives more than one official UID. The aim of this paper is to do a detailed study of ‘Unique Identification’, its advantages and disadvantages and how it helps in the development of India. Also a comparative study between India and other countries is done regarding the usage of the card.

Keywords: Unique Identification Number, Aadhar, Digital India.

1.Assistant Professor, Department of Computer Applications, T. John College. 2. Assistant Professor, Department of Computer Applications, T. John College.

173 Introduction

Dr. Manmohan Singh chartered the unique identity programme for citizens of India in 2009 and trusted the development and execution under the helm of Mr. Nandan Nilekeni who was then in the executive position of IT behemoth Infosys. Digital India is a colossal initiative to drive and empower India to minimize the digital divide and be in par with developed countries. This initiative improves the internet connectivity and the digital infrastructure. It was introduced by Prime Minister Shri. Narendra Modi in July, 2015. His vision is to connect rural India to other parts of India using high speed internet. Digital India’s various programme pillars do rely on the AADHAR identity. One prime example is making all the services for the citizens to be electronic and online. AADHAR helps online identity from “cradle to grave”. It also helps in electronic signature by biometric components. Easy online payments, credit of subsidies can now be AADHAR enabled in the bank accounts. Verifiable, accessible, paperless one-stop citizen documents using “Digital Locker” is a possibility that will use AADHAR as primary key in the whole database architecture.

Socio-Economic Advantages of Aadhar

AADHAR is a secure and unique online identity that can be used on a pan Indian basis. Since AADHAR is based on the demographic and biometric information it eliminates the threat of any fraud. Subsidies on food, LPG, education etcetera for people who are entitled to receive them, will be directly credited. It helps in opening bank accounts, getting new telephone, internet connections, power or gas connections, getting a passport, driving license, electoral card, enrollment in group life insurance schemes, accident insurance schemes and pension schemes to name a few. Further, AADHAR is used for investing in the stock market, Digital Life Certificate, employee provident fund, Digital Locker, RuPay card with free zero balance savings’ account. One must first grasp how AADHAR works in the most well-known application: the AADHAR-enabled payment system. This system allows people with an AADHAR ID to go to a micro-ATM and check their balance, withdraw money, deposit cash and transfer funds.

Information Backbone of Aadhar

IT companies such as TCS, Mac Associates, Wipro, HCL, HP, Sagem Morpho Securities, Satyam Computers and Communication companies namely Reliance Communication, Tata Communications, Aircel, Bharati Airtel, BSNL, Railtel Corporation of India Ltd. and Mongo DB were the approved partners for design

174 and content of the database. Morpho technology was used for biometrics. Several other companies include Grid Computing, Monitoring Data, Analytics and Visualization, Application–Program Interface (API) in collaboration with the government has started this project which has helped in the economic growth of India.

Aadhar – A Boon to the Education System

An academic record linked to AADHAR ID can identify the previous education of a student when he joins a new school. People involved in making policies and designing curricula can track academic results of students, even when they move across school systems in different states. Centum Learning – is a new scheme that grants government’s monetary rewards for the graduate students to create a stronger skilled and employable workforce. The rewards are directly transferred to the graduates’ bank accounts linked to AADHAR. Leveraging AADHAR to track students and electronically certify academic and employment histories can certainly contribute to the growth of India’s economy.

Aadhar in Financial Inclusion and Banking

AADHAR project provides a strong foundation to deliver banking services and improve the operational efficiency of the system. It connects many other IDs like Voter ID, Licenses, Ration Cards, Passports, KYC etcetera. The major constraint faced by the banks is the absence of valid identity and address proof of the client. AADHAAR number now enables the banks to open accounts with a greater speed and accuracy. Other beneficiaries that help to improve the country’s economy are Micro ATMs and Mobile Banking. This segment provides ample opportunities to improve business with cost effective solutions. AADHAR helps banks to reduce their NPA (Non Performing Assets). The launch of the scheme has many sub benefits like opening bank accounts, life and accident insurances with RuPay Card, free zero balance savings’ account. While payment services enabled via AADHAR have clear value in “financial inclusion” and save money by eliminating fraud and corruption.

Healthcare Benefits

Healthcare sector uses AADHAR to register births. AADHAR card could serve as a platform for innovations that can help monitoring epidemics and drug efficacy. The biometric card system has, in fact, helped the industry overcome the hurdle of cashless transactions for availing treatment at eligible hospitals. The E-health

175 initiative which is a part of Digital India Drive aims at providing effective and economical healthcare services to all the citizens. The programme aims to make use of technology and web portals to facilitate maintenance of people’s health records and book online appointments using eKYC data of AADHAR number.

Comparative Study between Different National IDs

INDIA USA SINGAPORE SRI LANKA AADHAR SSN – Social NRIC - National NIC - National Security Number Registration Identity Identity Card Card Used as a national Used as identity Used as an identity Used as a identity for people who for lawful residents proof of are authorized to identity work Provide LPG and NA NA NA other government subsidies Finger print and Finger print scan Finger print scan Finger print iris scan based only only scan only demographic information Provides Provide pensions, Citizenship, Required educational, medical insurance e-appointment, for applying health care, and personal i-Enquiry, Passport, passport, banking, pension accidental Online Birth and driving license, benefits, passport, insurance Death Extracts, voter ID and driving license, Notification of get any public voter ID, ration Change of Address, assistance etcetera Student's Online Registration

Conclusion

This paper presents the merits of our Unique National ID. Thus, AADHAR in the Digital India infrastructure plays a vital role and arguably forms a central nervous system for many Digital India initiatives and e-Governance projects. AADHAR and

176 AADHAR-enabled ecosystems will promise better India with inclusive of financial security and faster economic growth and digital literacy.

References 1. http://www.icmrindia.org/casestudies/catalogue/Project%20Management/ UIDAIs%20Aadhaar%20Project-Case.htm.

2. R. Ramakumar, "Identity Concerns," http://www.frontlineonnet.com, 2010.

3. "Unique ID will Enable More Effective Public Delivery," www.hindu.com, 2009.

4. Mahendra Kumar Singh, "Govt Salvages UID, Nod to Cover all 1.2 bn Indians," http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com, January 28, 2012.

5. "600 Million People to Get UIDs by 2014," www.dnaindia.com, January 21, 2012.

6. theviewspaper.net/a-comparative-study-of-the-usa-government-with-india

7. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/National_identity_cards_in_Singapore

8. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/National_identity

177 Anti-Snake Venom Study on Root and Rhizome of Corallocarpous epigaeus [RAttle. ex. willd,]cl. C .Nisha Shri1 & J Balaji2

Abstract

The research paper undertakes the study of the ethnobotanical information of decoction of root and rhizome of Corallocarpus epigaeus was used as a remedy for the snake bite of snakes such as rattlesnakes, copper heads and water moccasins which belong to the family of Crotalidae as well as coral snakes, venomous cobras, kraits, mambas, and sea snakes which belong to the family of Elapidae. The anti-venom property of the plant make the snake catchers chew the roots and rhizomes of it before going for wrangling. Hence, in the present study the anti-snake venom’s property of alcoholic and aqueous extracts of root and rhizome of Corallocarpus epigaeus was screened against the venom of Vipera russellii.

Keywords: Corallocarpus epigaeus, Vipera russellii, Anti-snake Venom, Toxin, Haemotoxic, Neurotoxic.

1. Assistant Professor, Department of Pharmacology, T. John College of Pharmacy. Bangalore 2. Principle Scientist, Biocon Park.

178 Introduction1-5

Man and snakes co-existed since the very beginning of human race. Perhaps there is no living creature in the animal kingdom other than the snakes which has received so much attention from human beings. Snake bite, a common health hazard occurs throughout the world including Indian subcontinent and leads to a high rate of mortality. There are nearly 3000 known species of snakes in the world out of which about 375 are venomous and remaining are non- venomous. Generally the poisonous snakes indigenous to India are members of Crotalidae and Elapidae family. Crotalidae or pit vipers include rattlesnakes, copper heads and water moccasins. Elapidae family includes coral snakes, venomous cobras, kraits, mambas, and sea snakes.

Snake venom is complex mixture of toxins which can be either hemotoxic or neurotoxic. Venom contains enzymes, enzymatic proteins and peptides. The toxic principles of snake venoms are neurotoxin, hemorrhagic, coagulators, cardiotoxic, myoneurotoxic, etc. Venom from pit viper is hemolytic. Russell’s viper “Daboia russelli” belongs to viperidae family which causes coagulation retardation of blood.

One of the enzymes that is present in all snake venom is hyaluronidase. It is known to have a spreading action, because it is the first enzyme to take action by facilitating other venom components through tissues and into the blood stream. It greatly increases the permeability of membranes, ruptures cell walls and alters coagulation. In a sense it acts as a vehicle to provide active transport for other toxic components.

The ethnobotanical information reveals that the decoction of root and rhizome of Corallocarpus epigaeus was used as remedy for snake bite. Because of this vital property of the plant, snake catcher’s chew the root and rhizomes before going for wrangling. Hence in present study the antisnake venom property of alcoholic and aqueous extracts of root and rhizome of Corallocarpus epigaeus was screened against the venom of Vipera russellii

Materials6-12  Heparin  Centrifuge  Human Red Blood Cells (HRBC) solution – 1 %  Russell’s viper venom, stock solution - 0.01 % w/v

179  Phosphate buffer – pH 7.4  UV Spectrophotometer  Physiological saline

Preparation of 1% HRBC

Blood was collected from human healthy volunteer by vein puncture and heparin was used as anticoagulant. The blood was collected, centrifuged at 3000 rpm for 30 min. The red cells in the bottom were collected and HRBC solution of 1 % concentration was prepared using physiological saline.

Preparation of 0.01 % Venom Stock Solution

Lyophilized venom of Russell’s viper was dissolved in physiological saline solution to prepare a stock of100 µg/ml.

Preparation of Drug Solutions

The dried extracts were dissolved and made into suspension of required concentration using physiological saline

Methodololgy6-12 In vitro Anti-snake Venom Activity

In vitro antivenom activity of Corallocarpus epigaeus was assessed by inhibition of in vitro HRBC lysis. HRBC membrane stabilization activity of methanolic and aqueous extract of Corallocarpus epigaeus was studied. The hyposaline-induced haemolysis was evaluated in vitro by the method of Roelofsen, et al., (1971) and Balu, et al.,(1995) with few modifications.

About 1 ml of diluted venom, phosphate buffer, and 1 % HRBC were taken to which different concentration of methanolic and aqueous extracts of Corallocarpus epigaeus were added. The control samples were the drug free saline solution. The mixtures were then incubated at 37 °C for 30 min and centrifuged at 1000 rpm for 3 mins. The supernatant solution was collected and its absorbance was measured at 540 nm using UV Spectrophotometer. The percentage inhibition of haemolysis was calculated using the formula

180 100 - (A1 -A2) % inhibition = X 100 A3 - A4

Where A1 = absorbance of test drug in venom solution A2 = absorbance of test drug in physiological saline A3 = absorbance of control in venom solution A4 = absorbance of control in physiological saline

Experimental Animals

All the experimental protocols were approved by Institutional Animal Ethical Committee. Healthy and normal Swiss albino mice of either sex weighing between 25-30 grams were used.

Acute Oral Toxicity Testing

Animals were fed with increasing doses of methanolic and aqueous extracts of roots and rhizomes of Corallocarpus epigaeus suspended in 1 % acacia. The animals were observed continuously for 2 hours for any gross behavioural changes and then intermittently once every 2 hours and finally at the end of 24 and 72 hours to note any other toxic signs including death of animals.

The LD50 values of viper venom was given by the venom supplier “The Irular Snake Catchers Industrial Cooperative Society Limited India 969, Kancheepuram, Tamil Nadu – 603 104” as 0.008 mg/ 18 g of mouse.

In vivo Anti-snake Venom Activity

The Swiss albino mice of either sex weighing between 25-30 grams were divided into 3 groups each containing six animals. Group 1 – Treated with vehicle served as control group Group 2 – Treated with methanolic extract of C. epigaeus 500 mg/kg Group 3 – Treated with aqueous extract of C. epigaeus 500 mg/kg

The animals were pretreated orally with methanolic and aqueous extract one week prior to administration of lethal dose of russell’s viper venom. The survival of the mice was observed and the results are tabulated.

181 Results & Discussion

In vitro HRBC membrane stabilization resulting in inhibition of venom induced hemolysis by alcoholic and aqueous extract of root and rhizome of C. epigaeus at concentration ranging from 25-500 mg/ml are presented in Table 1. Table 1 Percentage Inhibition of Hemolysis by Corallocarpus epigaeus Extracts Conc. of extracts Inhibition of hemolysis by Inhibition of hemolysis (µg/ml) alcoholic extract (%) by aqueous extract (%) 25 10.32 6.5 50 15.78 9.83 100 21.80 14.75 200 25.56 18.85 400 33.83 23.77 200 39.09 27.04

Most of the snake venom contains phospholipase and hemolysin which will act on membrane associated phospholipids liberating lysolecithin. Lysolecithin acts on the HRBC membrane causing hemolysis. Protection against venom induced hemolysis is thought to be because of stabilization of proteins in the membrane of HRBC.

Mortality of mice was decreased progressively in animals treated with alcoholic and aqueous extracts when compared with venom control group. Significant protection (P < 0.05) was observed at 500 mg/kg dose and the percentage survival was observed as 66.6 % and 50 % for methanolic and aqueous extracts respectively which are presented in Table 2. Table 2 Percentage Survival in Animals Treated with Extracts of Corallocarpus epigaeus

Treatment Total No. of Animals % Sur- Number of Survived after vival Animals Envenomation Vehicle + Venom 6 0 0 Methanolic extract (500 mg/kg) + Venom 6 4 66.66 Aqueous extract (500 mg/kg) + Ven- 6 3 50 om

182 Conclusion

The study concludes that the root and rhizome of Corallocarpus epigaeus possess significant antisnake venom property. Alcoholic extract exerted a better activity when compared with aqueous extract.

References 1. Lewis, S. M., Heitkemper, M. M., & Dirksen, S. R. (2004). Medical-surgical nursing assessment and management of clinical problems. 6th ed. 1858-59.

2. Pradhan, Patwardan, Tyagi, H. K., & Mathu, P. (1941). Snakes and human welfare, Zoological Survey of India. 124.

3. Harris J. B. (1991). Phosphdipases in snake venom and their effects on nerve and muscle. Snake toxins. 91-129.

4. Kabara, J. J., & Fisher G.H. (1969). Chemical composition of naja naja venom. Toxicon. 223

5. Zeller, E. A. (1977). Snake venom action: Are enzymes involved in it? Experientia 33, 143-150.

6. Bucherland, W., & Buckey, E. E. Venomous animals and their venoms. Vertebrates. 4, 7.

7. The Fauna of British India. Ceylon and Burma. 1981. 483.

8. Vijayabharathi, R., Arunkumar, Karthikeyan, S., & Kumar, S. (2006). In vitro and in vivo anti snake venom activity of coccinia Indica L.leaf. Hamdard medicus. 132-135.

9. Haruna, A. K. 1995. In vitro antisnake venom of a furanoid diterpene from Aristolochia albidu Duch. Indian Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences. 222.

10. Roelofsen, B. Z. Ward, R. F. A, Comfurices, P., Woodward, C. B., & Doenan, L.L M.V. (1971). Pharmacology of antivenom drugs. Biochem. Biophys. Acta. 241

11. Balu, S., & Alagesaboopathy. (1995). Antivenom activities of some species of Andrographs wall. Ancient sciences of life. 25, 3, 187

12. Chatterjee C. C. (1994). Human physiology. Medical allied agency. Vol 1. 125.

183 Natural Indicator Kinara Maheshwari1

Abstract

Plants have been the basis for medical treatments through much of human history and such traditional medicine is still widely practiced today. Modern medicine recognizes herbalism as a form of alternative medicine. A pH indicator is something that can tell whether a substance is an acid or a base. A visual acid-base indicator is just a weak acid with differently colored acid and conjugate base forms. The results produced by a synthetic indicator are not more reliable than the results produced by a natural indicator and natural indicators are much cheaper than synthetic indicators including culinary, medicinal and in some cases spiritual usage. All pH indicators change colours depending upon whether they donate or accept protons. Therefore, pH indicators are themselves acids or bases. Natural dyes indicate specific pH levels based on their chemical changes. Vegetables, berries, flowers like California Poppy, Catnip, Chamomile, Dill, Garlic, apples, autumn leaves, roses, strawberries, grapes and cranberry juice are red that indicate pH.

Keywords: ph Indicator, Herbalism, Acid-base Indicator, Synthetic Indicator, Natural Indicator, Protons.

1. Assistant Professor, T. John College of Pharmacy

184 Introduction:

Herbs[1]

In general use, herbs are any plants used for flavoring, food, medicine, or perfume. Culinary use typically distinguishes herbs as referring to the leafy green parts of a plant (either fresh or dried), from a "spice", a product from another part of the plant (usually dried), including seeds, berries, bark, roots and fruits. In botanical English, the word "herb" is also used as a synonym of "herbaceous plant". Herbs have a variety of uses including culinary, medicinal, and in some cases spiritual usage. General usage of the term "herb" differs between culinary herbs and medicinal herbs. In medicinal or spiritual use, any of the parts of the plant might be considered "herbs" including leaves, roots, flowers, seeds, resin, root, bark, inner bark (and cambium), berries and sometimes the pericarp or other portions of the plant.

Fig.1 Herbal Medicine

1.1 Herbalism [2]

Herbalism (or "herbal medicine") is use of plants for medicinal purposes and the study of such use. Plants have been the basis for medical treatments through

185 much of human history and such traditional medicine is still widely practiced today. Modern medicine recognizes herbalism as a form of alternative medicine as the practice of herbalism is not strictly based on evidence gathered using the scientific method. Modern medicine does, however, make use of many plant- derived compounds as the basis for evidence-tested pharmaceutical drugs and phytotherapy works to apply modern standards of effectiveness testing to herbs and medicines that are derived from natural sources. History [3]

Archaeological evidence indicates that the use of medicinal plants dates at least to the Paleolithic, approximately 60,000 years ago. Written evidence of herbal remedies dates back over 5,000 years, to the Sumerians, who created lists of plants. A number of ancient cultures wrote on plants and their medical uses. In ancient Egypt, herbs are mentioned in Egyptian medical papyri, depicted in tomb illustrations or on rare occasions found in medical jars containing trace amounts of herbs. The earliest known Greek herbals were those of Diocles of Carystus written during the 3rd century B.C and one by Krateuas from the 1st century B.C. Only a few fragments of these works have survived intact but from what remains scholars have noted that there is a large amount of overlap with the Egyptian herbals. Seeds likely used for herbalism have been found in the archaeological sites of Bronze Age China dating from the Shang Dynasty. Over a hundred of the 224 drugs mentioned in the Huangdi Neijing, an early Chinese medical text, are herbs. Herbs were also common in the medicine of ancient India, where the principal treatment for diseases was diet. De Materia Medica by Pedanius Dioscorides, a Roman physician, is a particularly important example of such writings. The documentation of herbs and their uses was a central part of both Western and Eastern medicine. Modern Herbal Medicine[4]

Many of the pharmaceuticals currently available to physicians have a long history of use as herbal remedies including opium, aspirin, digitalis and quinine. The World Health Organization (WHO) estimates that 80 percent of the population of some of the Asian and African countries presently uses herbal medicine for some aspect of primary health care. Pharmaceuticals are prohibitively expensive for most of the world's population, half of which lives on less than U.S.D $2 per day. In comparison, herbal medicines can be grown from seed or gathered from nature for little or no cost.

186 Uses of Herbal Medicine

The use of and search for drugs and dietary supplements derived from plants have accelerated in recent years. Pharmacologists, microbiologists, botanists and natural-products chemists are combing the Earth for phytochemicals and leads that could be developed for treatment of various diseases. In fact, according to the World Health Organization, approximately 25% of modern drugs used in the United States have been derived from plants. Among the 120 active compounds currently isolated from the higher plants and widely used in modern medicine today, 80 percent show a positive correlation between their modern therapeutic use and the traditional use of the plants from which they are derived. More than two thirds of the world's plant species—at least 35,000 of which are estimated to have medicinal value—come from the developing countries. At least 7,000 medical compounds in the modern pharmacopoeia are derived from plants In many medicinal and aromatic plants (MAPs), significant variations of plants characteristics have been ascertained with varying soil traits and the selective recovery and subsequent release in food of certain elements have been demonstrated. Great attention must be paid to choose soil and cropping strategies to obtain satisfactory yields of high quality. Some herbs are useful for treating sickness and disease. Here's a quick list of some of the more commonly known herbs and how they can be used to improve many aspects of your life:

• California Poppy: This pretty little flower is a powerful anti-anxiety medication. If you take a tincture in the evening it can ease tension and help you fall asleep.

• Catnip: When taken as a tea catnip can help ease a chronic cough or help you fall asleep.

Chamomile: A soothing, relaxing herb, chamomile is a great anti-anxiety treatment when taken as a tea.

• Dill: A digestive tonic to help soothe indigestion. • Garlic: A wonderful antibacterial that is great for treating colds and bacterial infections Herbal Preparations [5]

There are many forms in which herbs can be administered, the most common of which is in the form of a liquid that is drunk by the patient—either a tisane or a (possibly diluted) plant extract. Whole herb consumption is also practiced either fresh in dried form or as fresh juice. Several methods of standardization may be determining the amount of herbs used. One is the ratio of raw materials to

187 solvent. The leaves of Eucalyptus olida are packed into a steam distillation unit to gather their essential oil. Tisanes or "herbal teas" are the resultant liquid of extracting herbs into water though they are made in a few different ways. Infusions are hot water extracts of herbs such as chamomile or mint through steeping. Decoctions are the long-term boiled extracts usually of harder substances like roots or bark. Maceration is the old infusion of plants with high mucilage-content such as sage, thyme etcetera. Natural Indicators [6]

A pH indicator is something that can tell whether a substance is an acid or a base. A visual acid-base indicator is just a weak acid with differently coloured acid and conjugate base forms. A pH indicator is a halo chromic chemical compound that is added in small amounts to a solution so that the pH (acidity or alkalinity) of the solution can be determined easily. Hence a pH indicator is a chemical detector for hydronium ions (H3O+) (or Hydrogen ions (H+) in the Arrhenius model). Normally, the indicator causes the colour of the solution to change depending on the pH. Solutions with a pH value above 7.0 are alkali and solutions with a pH value below 7.0 are acidic. Solutions with a pH value of 7.0 are neutral.

Description:

Chemists choose selective natural indicators (such as litmus) to indicate specific pH levels based on their colour changes. Many plant pigments act as acid-base indicators and we can now appreciate why some of these pigment molecules behave the way they do. The blue and red pigments of flowers were isolated and extensively studied by R. M. Willstatter just before the outbreak of the First World War. Many indicators can be extracted from plants others like phenolphthalein and methyl orange are synthetic. The substances in the plant products such as tea, red cabbage or grapes react with acids or bases resulting in changes at the molecular level which causes their colour to be different at different pH levels. Red cabbage juice a natural pH indicator which is known to contain anthocynins which are pigments that react in a different way to acids and bases.

Cyanidin-based compounds make apples, autumn leaves, roses, strawberries, and cranberry juice red. They make blueberries, cornflowers and violets blue. Few examples of natural pH indicators:-

Alizarin is an orange dye present in the root of the madder plant; it was used to dye wool in ancient Egypt, Persia, and India. In a 0.5% alcohol solution, alizarin is yellow at pH 5.5 and red at pH 6.8. Several synthetic modifications of alizarin are also used as acid/base indicators.

188 Cochineal is an acid-base indicator made from the bodies of dried female cochineal insects, found in Mexico and Central America. You'll have to grind about 70,000 insects to make one pound of dry indicator. The powder is about 10% carminic acid which is yellow in acidic solution and deep violet in alkaline solution. Cochineal solutions are not used much as acid/base indicators these days.

• Curcumin or turmeric yellow is a natural dye found in curry powder. It turns from yellow at pH 7.4 to red at pH 8.6.

• Esculin is a fluorescent dye that can be extracted from the leaves and bark of the horse chestnut tree. You'll need to shine a black (ultraviolet) light on the indicator to get the full effect. Esculin changes from colourless at pH 1.5 to fluorescent blue at pH.

Is probably the most readily available acid/base indicator; it is the plant pigment that makes red cabbage purple, cornflower blue and poppies red.

It changes colour from red in acid solution to purplish to green in mildly alkaline solution to yellow in very alkaline solution. The colour changes for red cabbage juice are shown to the right. Litmus is a blue dye extracted from various species of lichens. Although these lichens grow in many parts of the world, almost all litmus is extracted and packaged in Holland. Litmus is red at pH 4.5 and blue around pH 8.3. While most litmus is used to make litmus papers, some are used as colouring agents for beverages. Flowers that Indicate pH

There are several flowers that are natural indicators of pH. Delphinium, geranium, morning glory, pansy, petunia, primrose, rose, tulip and violet all indicate high or low levels of acid in the soil, depending on the colour changes in the solution. But the simplest to use are marigolds, hydrangeas, red cabbage and red wine because the natural pigments in these flowers, vegetables and wine will change based on the pH of the soil in question. Vegetables that Indicate pH

Many vegetables also indicate high or low levels of acid in the soil, including beets, carrots, onions, red or purple cabbage, radishes and rhubarb. Berries that indicate pH Berries can indicate the soil pH. Both black and blueberries, cherries, the leaves of horse chestnuts and strawberries can indicate whether the soil has a low or high level of pH. The key elements in soil that determine how healthy your garden

189 will be are nitrogen, pH, phosphorous and potassium. In addition to watching the different pigments in garden berries, flowers or vegetables you might want to perform a soil pH test every few years. Theory of Indicator [7]

An indicator is a substance which is used to determine the end point in a titration. In acid-base titrations, organic substances (weak acids or weak bases) are generally used as indicators. They change their colour within a certain pH range. The colour change and the pH range of some common indicators are tabulated below: Indicator pH range Colour Change 1. Methyl Orange 3.2-4.5 Pink to Yellow 2. Methyl Red 4.4-6.5 Red to Yellow 3. Litmus 5.5-7.5 Red to Blue 4. Phenol Red 6.8-8.4 Yellow to Red 5. Phenolphthalein 8.3-10.5 Colourless to Pink

Theory of Acid-base Indicators:

Two theories have been proposed to explain the change of colour of acid-base indicators with change in pH.

Ostwald's Theory: According to this theory:

(a) The colour change is due to ionisation of the acid-base indicator. The unionised form has different colour than the ionised form.

(b) The ionisation of the indicator is largely affected in acids and bases as it is either a weak acid or a weak base. In case, the indicator is a weak acid, its ionisation is very much low in acids due to common H+ ions while it is fairly ionised in alkalies. Similarly, if the indicator is a weak base its ionisation is high in acids and low in alkalies due to common OH- ions. Considering two important indicators phenolphthalein (a weak acid) and methyl orange (a weak base), Ostwald theory can be illustrated as follows:

Phenolphthalein: It can be represented as HPh. It ionises in solution to a small extent as: HPh ↔ H+ + Ph- Colourless Pink

190 Natural Indicators [8]

There are many natural pH indicators. Basically, a pH indicator is any substance that can indicate the degree of acidity or basicity of a given solution usually through color changes. Usually when you think of a pH indicator, you think of litmus paper in high school chemistry class. The natural pH indicators also called acid-base indicators are typically derived from plants. The most common natural pH indicator is anthocyanin found in most plants that are coloured red, blue, or violet.

The list of some natural indicators is listed below: 1. Red Cabbage 2. Rose Petals 3. Blue or Red Grapes 4. Ipomoea Biloba 5. Hydrangea macrophylla

1. Red Cabbage [9]

Fig. 2 Red Cabbage Plant : Red cabbage Scientific Classification Kingdom : Plantae Subkingdom : Eudicots

191 Subclass : Asteridae Order : Brassicales Family : Brassicaceae Genus : Brassica Species : B. Oleracea

Description [10]

The botanical name for cabbage is Brassica oleracea capitata. The English name cabbage comes from the French caboche, meaning head, referring to its round form. The red cabbage (Brassica oleracea var. capitata f. rubra) is a sort of cabbage also known as purple cabbage, red kraut, or blue kraut after preparation. Its leaves are coloured dark red/purple. However, the plant changes its colour according to the pH value of the soil due to a pigment belonging to anthocyanins (flavins). In acidic soils, the leaves grow more reddish, in neutral soils they will grow to be purple while in an alkaline soil it will produce rather greenish-yellow coloured cabbages. This explains the fact that the same plant is known by different colours in various regions. Chemical Constituents

Red cabbage juice contains anthocyanin and can be used as a pH indicator. It is red, pink, or magenta in acids, (pH < 7), purple in neutral solutions (pH ~ 7) and ranges from blue to green to yellow in alkaline solutions (pH > 7) pH indicator

Fig. 3 pH test Blue Green Colour Pink Dark Red Violet Blue Green Yellow Approx pH 1-2 3-4 5-7 8 9-10 11-12 Acid/Base Acid Acid Acid/Neutral Base Base Base

192 Red cabbage juice is a good indicator of pH since it contains a wide range of colours. Red cabbage is rich in a pigment called Cyanidin which is one of several anthocyanidin pigments found in plants. Red cabbage contains a pigment molecule called flavin, an anthocyanin. Acidic solutions turn anthocyanin a red color. Neutral solutions produce a purplish colour. Red cabbage is useful as a pH indicator because the leaves contain a pigment molecule from the family of anthocyanins (shown below) which are responsible for many of the red/purple/ blue colours observed in fruits and vegetables. In neutral solutions, the colour observed is purple. As the solution becomes more acidic a red color results. Increasing the pH in basic solutions changes the colour from blue to green and at high pH the solution is observed as greenish-yellow.

2. Rose [11] Plant Profile

Fig. 4 Rose

Plant : Rose plant Scientific Classification:- Kingdom : Plantae Subkingdom : Eudicots Subclass : Asteridae Order : Rosales

193 Family : Rosaceae Subfamily : Rosoideae Genus : Rosa Species : Hulthemia Description

There are over 100 species. They form a group of plants that can be erect shrubs, climbing or trailing with stems that are often armed with sharp prickles. Flowers vary in size and shape and are usually large and showy in colours ranging from white through yellows and reds. Most species are native to Asia, with smaller numbers native to Europe, North America and northwest Africa. Species, cultivars and hybrids are all widely grown for their beauty and often are fragrant. Rose plants range in size from compact, miniature roses, to climbers that can reach 7 meters in height. The leaves are borne alternately on the stem. In most species they are 5 to 15 centimetres (2.0 to 5.9 inches) long, pinnate, with (3–) 5–9 (–13) leaflets and basal stipules; the leaflets usually have a serrated margin, and often a few small prickles on the underside of the stem. Most roses are deciduous but a few (particularly from South east Asia) are evergreen or The flowers of most species have five petals, with the exception of Rosa sericea, which usually has only four. Each petal is divided into two distinct lobes and is usually white or pink, though in a few species yellow or red. Beneath the petals are five sepals (or in the case of some Rosa sericea, four). These may be long enough to be visible when viewed from above and appear as green points alternating with the rounded petals. There are multiple superior ovaries that develop into achens. Roses are insect-pollinated in nature.12

Species The genus Rosa is subdivided into four sub genera:

Hulthemia (formerly Simplicifoliae, meaning "with single leaves") containing one or two species from southwest Asia, R. persica and Rosa berberifolia which are the only roses without compound leaves or stipules. Hesperrhodos (from Greek for "western rose") contains Rosa minutifolia and Rosa stellata from North America. Platyrhodon (from Greek for "flaky rose", referring to flaky bark) is with one species from east of Asia, Rosa roxburghii. Rosa (the type subgenus) containing all the other roses. This subgenus is subdivided into 11 sections.

194 Chemical Constituents:

The rose hip usually from R. canina is used as a minor source of Vitamin C. The fruits of many species have significant levels of vitamins and have been used as a food supplement. Many roses have been used in herbal and folk medicines. Rosa chinensis has long been used in Chinese traditional medicine. This and other species have been used for stomach problems, and are being investigated for Ergonovine (ergometrine) Use

Roses are best known as ornamental plants grown for their flowers in the garden and sometimes indoors. They have been also used for commercial perfumery and commercial cut flower crops. Some are used as landscape plants, for hedging and for other utilitarian purposes such as game cover and slope stabilization. Pests and Diseases

Wild roses are host plants for a number of pests and diseases. Cultivated roses are often subject to severe damage from insect, arachnid and fungal pests and diseases.

3. Hydrangea macrophylla [13]

Fig. 5 Hydrangea macrophylla Plant : Hydrangea macrophylla Scientific Classification Kingdom : Plantae

195 Subclass : Asteridae Order : Cornales Family : Hydrangeaceae Genus : Hydrangea Species : H. macrophylla

Description:- Hydrangea macrophylla is a species native to China and Japan. It is a deciduous shrub growing to 2 m (7 ft) tall by 2.5 m (8 ft) broad with large heads of pink or blue flowers in summer and autumn. Common names include big leaf hydrangea, French hydrangea, lace cap hydrangea, mophead hydrangea, penny mac and hortensia. It is widely cultivated in many parts of the world in many climates. It is not to be confused with PH. aspera 'Macrophylla'.

The term macrophylla means large- or long-leaved. The opposite leaves can grow to 15 cm (6 inches) in length. They are simple, membranous, orbicular to elliptic and acuminate. They are generally serrated. The inflorescence of Hydrangea macrophylla is a corymb with all flowers placed in a plane or a hemisphere or even a whole sphere in cultivated forms. Two distinct types of flowers can be identified: central non-ornamental fertile flowers and peripheral ornamental flowers, usually described as "sterile". A study of several cultivars showed that all the flowers were fertile but the non-ornamental flowers were pentamers while the decorative flowers were tetramers. Flowering lasts from early summer to early winter. The fruit is a subglobose capsule.

Chemical Constituents [13] Phyllodulcin, hydrangenol and their 8-O-glucosides and thunberginols A and F can be found in H. macrophylla. Thunberginol B, the dihydroisocoumarins thunberginol C, D and E, the dihydroisocoumarin glycosides thunberginol G 3'-O-glucoside and (-)-hydrangenol 4'-O-glucoside and four kaempferol and quercetin oligoglycoside can be found in Hydrangeae Dulcis Folium, the processed leaves of H. macrophylla var. thunbergii. The leave also contains the stilbenoid hydrangeic acid anthocyanin, delphinidin 3-glucoside.

Uses

Amacha is a Japanese beverage made from fermented leaves of Hydrangea macrophylla thunbergii.

196 Leaf-extracts of Hydrangea macrophylla are being investigated as a possible source of new chemical compounds with anti-malarial activity.

Hydrangeic acid from the leaves is being investigated as a possible anti-diabetic drug as it significantly lowered blood glucose, triglyceride and free fatty acid levels in laboratory animals. • Hydrangeae Dulcis Folium is a drug made from the fermented and dried leaves of H. macrophylla var. thunbergii with possible antiallergic and antimicrobial properties. It also has a hepatoprotective activity by suppression of D-galactosamine-induced liver injury in vitro and in vivo.

4. Ipomoea Biloba [14] Plant Profile

Fig. 6 Ipmoea Biloba

Plant : IPOMOEA BILOBA Scientific Classification Kingdom : Plantae Order : Solanales Family : Convolvulaceae Tribe : Ipomoeeae Genus : Ipomoea Synonyms : Acmostemon Pilg. Batatas Choisy

197 Description

Ipomoea biloba is a plant of runner variety commonly found in the coastal region throughout the state of Kerala, India (Nadkarni, 1994). The name biloba was coined due to its feature in leaf – the leaf of the plant appears as two lobes hence the name biloba. The plant is also called as Ipomoea pescaprae (Germplasm resources information network). The flower of the plant is pink colored and the plant belongs to Convolvulaceae family (Khare, 2007) [17] .The plant is yearly flowering and easily available in sea shores throughout the Arabian Sea. Ipomoea is the largest genus in the flowering plant family Convolvulaceae, with over 500 species. It is a large and diverse group with common names including morning glory, sweet potato, bindweed, moonflower etcetera. The most widespread common name is morning glories but there are also species in related genera bearing the same common name. Those formerly separated in Calonyction (Greek καλός, kalos meaning good and νύκτα, nycta meaning night) are called moonflowers.[18] The generic name is derived from Greek words ιπς (ips) or ιπος (ipos), meaning "worm" or "bindweed," and όμοιος (homoios) meaning "resembling"

Chemical Constituents

Ergine (D-Lysergic Acid Amide)

198 Ergonovine (Ergometrine)

Humans use Ipomoea for their content of medical and psychoactive compounds, mainly alkaloids. Some species are renowned for their properties in folk medicine and herbalism, for example, Vera Cruz jalap (I. jalapa) and Tampico jalap (I. simulans) are used to produce jalap, a cathartic preparation accelerating the passage of stool. Kiribadu Ala (giant potato, I. mauritiana) is one of the many ingredients of Chyawanprash, the ancient Ayurvedic tonic called "the elixir of life" for its wide-ranging properties. Ergoline derivatives (lysergamides) are probably responsible for the entheogenic activity. Ergine (LSA), isoergine, D-lysergic acid N(αhydroxyethyl)amide and lysergol have been isolated from I. tricolor, I. violacea and/or purple morning glory (I. purpurea).

Uses:

Most species have spectacular, colorful flowers and are often grown as ornamentals and a number of cultivars have been developed. Their deep flowers attract large Lepidoptera - especially Sphingidae such as the pink-spotted hawk moth (Agrius cingulata) - or even hummingbirds. [20]

The genus includes food crops: the tubers of sweet potatoes (Ipomoea batatas) and the leaves of water spinach (I. aquatica) are commercially important food items

199 and have been for millennia. The sweet potato is one of the Polynesian "canoe plants" transplanted by settlers on islands throughout the Pacific. Water spinach is used all over eastern Asia and the warmer regions of the Americas as a key component of well-known dishes, such as Canh chua rau muống (Mekong sour soup) or callaloo, its numerous local names attest to its popularity. Other species are used on a smaller scale, for example, the whitestar potato (I. lacunosa) traditionally eaten by some Native Americans such as the Chiricahua Apaches or the Australian bush potato (I. costata).

Pests and Diseases

Many herbivores avoid morning glories such as Ipomoea, as the high alkaloid content makes these plants unpalatable, if not toxic. Nonetheless, Ipomoea species are used as food plants by the caterpillars of certain Lepidoptera (butterflies and moths); see list of Lepidoptera which feed on Ipomoea. For a selection of diseases of the sweet potato (I. batatas) many of which also infect other members of this genus.

5. Grapes [15] Plant Profile

Fig. 7 Grapes

200 Plant : Grapes 2.2 Scientific Classification Kingdom : Plantae Subclass : Asteridae Order : Cornales Family : Vitisvinifera, Genus : Vitis. Species : Vitislabrusca

Description

A grape is a fruiting berry of the deciduous woody vines of the botanical genus Vitis. Grapes can be eaten raw or they can be used for making wine, jam, juice, jelly, grape seed extract, raisins, vinegar, and grape seed oil. Grapes are a non-climacteric type of fruit generally occurring in clusters.

Grapes are a type of fruit that grow in clusters of 15 to 300 and can be crimson, black, dark blue, yellow, green, orange and pink. "White" grapes are actually green in color and are evolutionarily derived from the purple grape. Mutations in two regulatory genes of white grapes turn off production of anthocyanins which are responsible for the color of purple grapes. Anthocyanins and other pigment chemicals of the larger family of polyphenols in purple grapes are responsible for the varying shades of purple in red wines. Grapes are typically an ellipsoid shape resembling a prolate spheroid.

Distribution

According to the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), 75,866 square kilometers of the world are dedicated to grapes. Approximately 71% of world grape production is used for wine, 27% as fresh fruit and 2% as dried fruit. A portion of grape production goes to producing grape juice to be reconstituted for fruits canned "with no added sugar" and "100% natural". The area dedicated to vineyards is increasing by about 2% per year.

Seedless Grapes [16]

Seedless cultivars now make up the overwhelming majority of table grape plantings because grapevines are propagated through vegetative cuttings, the lack of seeds does not present a problem for reproduction. It is an issue for

201 breeders who must either use a seeded variety as the female parent or rescue embryos early in development using tissue culture techniques. An offset to the improved eating quality of seedlessness is the loss of potential health benefits provided by the enriched phytochemical content of grape seeds (see Health Claims, below).

Chemical Constituents: Resveratrol [17]

Synthesized by many plants, resveratrol apparently serves antifungal and other defensive properties. Dietary resveratrol has been shown to modulate the metabolism of lipids and to inhibit oxidation of low-density lipoproteins and aggregation of platelets. Fresh grape skin contains about 50 to 100 micrograms of resveratrol per gram. Anthocyanins and other phenolics [18] Anthocyanins tend to be the main polyphenolics in purple grapes whereas flavan-3-ols (i.e. catechins) are the more abundant phenolic in white varieties. Uses

Apart from potential benefits of alcohol itself, including reduced platelet aggregation and vasodilation, polyphenols Alteration of molecular mechanisms in blood vessels, reducing susceptibility to vascular damage. Decreased activity of angiotensin, a systemic hormone causing blood vessel constriction that would elevate blood pressure and lead to increased production of the vasodilator hormone, nitric oxide (endothelium-derived relaxing factor) [19].

Conclusion

In general use, herbs are used for flavoring, food, medicine, or perfume. In botanical English, the word "herb" is also used as a synonym of "herbaceous plant". Herbs have a variety of uses including culinary, medicinal and in some cases spiritual usage. All pH indicators changes colors depending upon whether they donate or accept protons. Therefore, pH indicators are themselves acids or bases. Natural dyes indicate specific pH levels based on their chemical changes. Testing the pH of substances is very important. If the pH of your blood changes by just a fraction of a level, it could kill you. The pH can be tested by using an indicator which will change colour according to the pH. From the pH it can be determined either the liquid is an acid or base and calculate the concentration of H+ ions

202 Drawbacks with Available Synthetic Indicators a) It is easier to produce natural indicators than it is to produce synthetic indicators. b) Natural indicators are much cheaper than synthetic indicators. c) The results produced by a synthetic indicator are not more reliable than the results produced by any natural indicator. Advantages of Natural Indicators: a) The natural indicators are non toxic, non- irritant. b) Natural indicators are eco –friendly. c) Litmus is beneficial to determine whether something is acidic or alkaline because it's easy to get a red, red-blue or blue-red which is very easy to determine.

There are many natural pH indicators available for use. Nearly any plant that is red, blue, or violet will work as a pH indicator because of the anthocyanin that gives the plant its lovely color.

References: 1. Herbs, Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia.

2. Herbalism, Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia.

3. Nunn, John. (2002). Ancient Egyptian Medicine. University of Oklahoma Press. pp. 151

4. Dasilva, E. J., Baydoun E., & Badran A. (2002). Biotechnology and Developing World. Electronic Journal of Biotechnology, Voulme-5, pp 320- 322.

5. Herz, R. S., & J., Neurosci. (2009). Aroma therapy Facts and Fiction: A Scientific Analysis. Int pp 263–290.

6. Ingrid, J. et al. (2001). Natural pH Indicators: What are they and how do they work?. Acids and Bases. Nelson Science

7. Kirurhiga, B., Dept of Pharmaceutical Chemistry; Theory of Indicators.

8. Helmenstine, A. M., Ph.D., Home and Garden pH Indicators.

9. Red Cabbage, From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia.

203 10. Filippone P. T. (2006). Cabbage History - The history of cabbage as food Jacques Cartier brought cabbage to the Americas, pp. 288.

11. Rose, From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia.

12. Mabberley D. J. (1997). The plant book: A portable dictionary of the vascular plants. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, pp. 488.

13. Hydrangea macrophylla, From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia.

14. Ipomoea Biloba, From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia

15. Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia Grapes.

16. Reisch, B. I., Peterson, D. V., & Martens, M. H. (2008). “Seedless Grapes”, Cornell University, New York State Agricultural Experiment Station, retrieve

17. Das, S., & Das D. K. (2007). Resveratrol: A therapeutic promise for cardiovascular diseases. Recent patents on cardiovascular drug discovery, pp. 133–138.

18. Mattivi, F., Guzzon, R., Vrhovsek, U. Stefanini, M., & Velasco, R. (2006). "Metabolite Profiling of Grape: Flavonols and Anthocyanins". Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry; 2006, pp. 7692–7702.

19. Chan, W. K., & Delucchi, A. B. (2000). Resveratrol: A red wine constituent is a mechanism-based in activator of cytochrome, pp. 3103–3112.

204 Cyclooxygenase 3 Inhibition: A Probable Mechanism of Acetaminophen in Human- A Review Iswar Hazarika1 & Dr. Panner Selvam2

Abstract

The key rate-limiting step in prostanoid and thromboxane biosynthesis is catalyzed by Cyclooxygenases (COXs) and is the target of nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs). Until recently, the existence of only two isoforms—COX-1 and COX-2—remained under debate as the anti-pyretic and analgesic property of acetaminophen (paracetamol) could not be explained by mere COX-1 or COX-2 blockades. A novel COX-1 splice variant termed COX-3, sensitive to acetaminophen was recently discovered in dog brain by Simmons et al., and is considered to play a major role in the biosynthesis of prostanoids known to be significant mediators in pain and fever. Drugs that preferential block COX-1 also appear to act at COX-3. However, at the nucleotide sequence level in humans the existence of COX-3 is questionable. A functional COX-3 in humans is still perplexing, underlining that the concept of COX-3 is still attractive.

Keywords: Prostanoid, Thromboxane Biosynthesis, Cyclooxygenases, Nonsteroidal Anti-Inflammatory Drugs, Acetaminophen

1. Assistant Professor, Department of Pharmacology, T. John College of Pharmacy. 2. Associate Professor, Department of Pharmaceutics, T. John College of Pharmacy.

205 Introduction:

Although humans have been using non-steroid anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) in various forms for more than 3,500 years, the mechanism of action of NSAIDs was proposed by Sir John Vane in 1971 through their inhibition of prostaglandin biosynthesis via the enzyme cyclooxygenase (COX or prostaglandin H2 synthase). [1] Some years later in 1990, a group of researcher discovered the presence of at least two isoforms, COX 1 and COX 2. [2] Almost all available non- specific NSAIDs block both COX isoforms, which can diminish the amounts of prostaglandins formed by COX-1 and COX-2. However, despite this long history and large volume of use we still have an incomplete understanding of how the NSAIDs achieve their actions. Most recently, Molecular Biology, along with Pharmacology, Dan Simmon’s and Chandrasekharan’s group reported the discovery of a novel cyclo-oxygenase enzyme variant in dogs brain “COX 3” that could be the target of acetaminophen and other analgesic antipyretic drugs. [3, 4] This COX enzyme was a variant of COX 1 and derived from the same gene. The importance of COX-3 is that it could explain the pharmacological actions of paracetamol and other antipyretic analgesic drugs which are weak inhibitors of COX-1 and COX-2 [5] but penetrate easily into the central nervous system [6] Non-steroid anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), such as diclofenac or ibuprofen are also potent inhibitors of COX-3 expressed in cultured cells [3], but being highly polar they are unlikely to reach brain COX-3 in effective concentrations.

Here, we discuss some of the implications drawn from the identification of additional functional cyclooxygenase members in the generation of bioactive autacoids.

Pathway of Prostaglandin and Thromboxane Synthesis:

The ability of NSAIDs to reduce the formation of prostaglandin was associated with inhibition of COX which converts arachidonic acid to the prostaglandin precursor prostaglandin (PG) H2. [1] The prostanoid family was revealed through associated studies and PGH2 was shown to be the precursor for prostanoids including PGD2, PGE2, PGF2, PGI2, and thromboxane A2. [7] A general schematic pathway of Prostaglandin and Thromboxane synthesis are given in Fig 1.

206 Action of Prostaglandins and Thromboxanes

Understanding that the NSAIDs inhibited prostanoid formation led to an appreciation of the mechanisms underlying the effects of these drugs. At sites of inflammation, the local production of prostanoids such as PGE2 can sensitize pain nerve endings and increase blood flow, promoting feelings of pain and driving tissue swelling and redness [1, 5]. Inhibition of PGE2 formation via the inhibition of local COX could therefore explain the anti-inflammatory effects of NSAIDs. Similarly, prostanoids such as PGI2 and PGE2 were found to be protective to the stomach and so inhibition of their formation provided an explanation for the gastrointestinal toxicity associated with prolonged and high-dose use of NSAIDs [1,5,8]. The inhibition of COX in platelets provided an explanation for the ability of aspirin to reduce blood clotting [9].

207 But still there were a number of questions that remained unanswered through the 1970s and 1980s. For instance, why, when used at similar anti-inflammatory doses, were the NSAIDs differently toxic to the gastrointestinal tract [5, 10]? Also, how did acetaminophen fit into this scheme? Did it act by inhibiting COX? Intriguingly, test tube experiments showed that acetaminophen might selectively target the COX present in the brain [11]. Could this explain why it was analgesic and antipyretic but not anti-inflammatory?

The next great step forward in our understanding of the NSAIDs came in the early 1990s with the demonstration that there were two isoforms of COX: COX-1, which was constitutively expressed, and COX-2, which was inducible [1, 5, 12–15]. COX-2 was rapidly up-regulated at inflammatory sites and appeared responsible for the formation of proinflammatory prostanoids. COX- 1, meanwhile, appeared to shoulder the responsibility for the production of physiologically relevant prostanoids such as those in the stomach and platelets [1, 5]. Pharmacology defined the selectivity of existing NSAIDs on these COX enzymes [1, 5, 16] and played a key role in producing a new generation of COX-2-selective drugs (now selling in vast quantity). These drugs would, it was hoped, be anti-inflammatory as good as the traditional NSAIDs but have much reduced toxic side effects, particularly on the gastrointestinal tract [1, 5]. Although providing a much-needed leap in our understanding, the COX-1_-2 model did not appear to explain everything. Even though in inflammatory models COX-2 inhibitors were as active as traditional NSAIDs, worked similarly in both human and animal models of pain, and reduced fever in a similar way to the NSAIDs [1, 5, 16], there were still some confusing issues. For example, the widespread use of the newer generation of COX-2-selective compounds demonstrated that COX-2 also had physiological roles, being involved, for instance, in the maintenance of fluid balance by the kidney [18].

Probable Mechanism of Paracetamol

The COX-1/-2 model was also not accommodating to the characteristics of acetaminophen: although its antipyretic and analgesic effects might be explained by inhibition of COX-2, why was acetaminophen not anti-inflammatory [19]? Dan Simmon’s group suggests this is because of the presence of a variant of COX-1, which they have named COX-3, that is, especially sensitive to acetaminophen and related compounds [3]. If this enzyme were particularly expressed in the brain, could it explain both the characteristics of acetaminophen and Flower and Vane’s findings? [11] It is difficult to produce an unequivocal reply, but let us try to approach an answer by drawing on what we know about acetaminophen and the roles of COX-1 and -2. To begin with, let us consider fever, because pyresis

208 is a more simply modeled process than analgesia. Interestingly, and at odds with Chandrasekharan et al. [3], studies of the prostanoid-producing enzyme underlying pyresis associate it to neither COX-1 protein nor the COX-1 gene. For instance, in mice, it is deletion of the COX-2 but not of the COX-1 gene (which also encodes COX-3) that blunts pyresis [20]. In addition, COX-2-selective inhibitors, which will react weakly with the COX-3 enzymatic site, because it is identical to that in COX-1, are as good at reducing fever similarly as traditional NSAIDs [21–24]. The fever response has also been clearly associated with a rapid induction of COX-2 expression and an associated increase in PGE2 production [25], with no role for COX-1 or a COX-1 gene product (e.g., COX-3). Finally, the sites of COX-3 expression do not appear to accord well with those sites associated with fever, and we might expect to see the protein present within the hypothalamus [26] rather than the cerebral cortex. All these considerations appear to argue against the COX-3 of Chandrasekharan et al. [3] being the site of the antipyretic actions of NSAIDs and COX-2-selective agents. However, the results

209 from Chandrasekharan et al. could be read as showing that acetaminophen acts at a different site to the other NSAIDs and that more than one COX isoform contributes to the fever response.

Pain is a more difficult process to unravel. As outlined above, prostanoids produced at sites of inflammation can sensitize nerve endings and so promote the localized feelings of pain associated with inflammatory events and tissue injury [27]. These prostanoids can be produced by COX-2 induced by the local inflammatory processes. How then does acetaminophen bring about its analgesic effects, because it is not a peripheral anti-inflammatory? With the discovery of COX-2, new efforts have been made to comprehend the roles of prostanoids within the central nervous system (CNS). It appears that COX-2 is constitutively expressed in the CNS and also rapidly up-regulated to reinforce pain perception [28, 29]. Could acetaminophen act on this CNS enzyme? COX-2-selective inhibitors appear to produce analgesic responses at least as good as traditional NSAIDs in inflammatory, dental, or postoperative pain [30-32]. These activities would support, as above, a role for COX-2 or a COX-2 variant rather than a COX- 1 variant. But maybe acetaminophen targets an additional enzyme. We know there may be both redundancy and compensatory increases in COX enzymes; for instance, COX-2 may be upregulated when COX-1 is inhibited in the stomach [33]. Furthermore, Dan Simmon’s group has previously proposed the existence of an isoform of COX-2 that is particularly sensitive to acetaminophen [4, 34].

From the above, it seems that the most significant implication of the study of Chandrasekharan et al. [3] is that multiple COX isoenzymes could be derived from just two distinct genes providing a COX continuum of enzymes and products (Fig. 2). Could the presence of multiple isoforms of COX-1 and -2 explain why there are so many different NSAIDs on the market and why different patients appear to benefit from different types of NSAID? If we express variants of COX-1 and -2, could different drugs inhibit different variants to different extents? Indeed, could these findings help us understand some of the side effects of NSAIDs and COX-2-selective inhibitors? For example, much recent attention has been paid to the ability of COX-2-selective inhibitors to reduce circulating PGI2 levels and to the hypothesis that this could be linked to an increase in thrombotic risk [35]. Interestingly, acetaminophen also reduces circulating PGI2 levels [36], yet it is not a selective COX-2 inhibitor. Could this PGI2 actually be formed by the COX-3 that Chandrasekharan et al. [3] have found in the heart and aorta? Or could varied products from just two distinct genes provide a family of COX proteins with overlapping contributions to prostanoid production throughout the body? Might both inducible COX-2 and COX-3 be involved in the fever response, whereas both constitutive COX-2 and COX-3 contribute to the circulatory production of PGI2? We know that both COX-1 and -2 have constitutive roles in the kidney. All

210 this has yet to be understood but as we continue to push toward an understanding it is important to note that Chandrasekharan et al.’s study also tells us that modifications in regions of the COX molecule other than the enzymatic site may influence inhibitor selectivity possibly by affecting the interplay with other active intracellular species [37]. In terms of our 3,500-year quest to understand the mechanism of action of the NSAIDs, Dan Simmon’s group has provided another significant step forward.

Conclusion Some recent and exciting scientific discoveries surrounding COX have led to a further conceptual understanding and much confusion in the scientific literature about formation, action and nomenclature of these prostanoid-producing enzymes. Presently, there remain just a handful of research papers available regarding these COX variant discoveries. Ultimately, however, there is not any concrete scientific evidence for an actual third independent COX gene in the literature to date. Although COX isoenzymes are presently derived from two distinct genes this does not rule out the possibility of other undiscovered COX genes. With the wisdom of retrospection we can be confident that COX-1, COX-2 and their variants will all demonstrate physiological and pathological roles. Whether or not a consequential target of acetaminophen activity has been actually discovered still remains to be seen. Perhaps the most pertinent scientific question that remains to be comprehended surrounding COX is why are there so many. The determination of this perplexity and a swift riposte may lie in our eventual understanding of the natural substrates for COX other than arachidonic acid. Optimistically, these COX variants may eventually lead to more effective pain relievers, anti-inflammatories, anti-pyretics, anti-cancer agents or treatments for Alzheimer’s and other conditions. Undoubtedly, and all of these potential indications and avenues will surely be exploited (if possible) by pharmaceutical companies in the future.

References 1. Vane, J. R. Inhibition of prostaglandin synthesis as a mechanism of action for aspirin-like drugs. Nat New Bio, 1971; 231(25): 232-235.

2. Fu, J. Y., Masferrer J. L., Seibert, K., Raz, A., & Needleman P. The induction and suppression of prostaglandin H2 synthase (cylcooxygenase) in human monocytes. J Biol Chem, 1990; 265(28): 1727-1740.

3. Chandrasekharan, N. V., Dai, H., Roos, K. L., Evanson, N. K., Tomsik, J., Elton, T.S., & Simmons, D.L. (2002). COX-3, a cyclooxygenase-1 variant

211 inhibited by acetaminophen and other analgesic/antipyretic drugs: cloning, structure, and expression. Proc Natl Acad Sci U. S. A, 99(21): 13926-31. 4. Simmons, D. L., Botting, R M., Robertson M., Madsen M L., & Vane, J. R. (1999). Induction of an acetaminophensensitive cyclooxygenase with reduced sensitivity to nonsteroid antiinflammatory drugs. Proc Natl Acad Sci U. S. A., 96(6): 3275-80. 5. Mitchell, J. A., Akarasereenont, P., Thiemermann, C., Flower, R. J., & Vane, J. R. (1993). Selectivity of nonsterioidal anti-inflammatory drugs as inhibitors of constitutive and inducible cyclooxygenase. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 1993; 90(24): 11693–11697. 6. Courade, J. P., Besse, D., Delchambre, C., Hanoun, N., Hamon, M., Eschalier, A., Caussade, F., & Cloarec, A. (2001). Acetaminophen distribution in the rat central nervous system, Life Sci. 69 1455–1464. 7. Samuelsson, B. (1983). An elucidation of the arachidonic acid cascade. Discovery of prostaglandins, thromboxane and leukotrienes. Bio Sci. Rep., 33(1): 791–813. 8. Wolfe, M. M., Lichtenstein, D. R., & Singh, G. (1999). Gastrointestinal toxicity of nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs. N. Engl. J. Med. 340(24): 1888–1899. 9. Patrono, C. (2001). Aspirin: new cardiovascular uses for an old drug. Am. J. Med. 110(1A): 62S–65S. 10. Henry, D., Lim, L. L., Garcia, Rodriguez L. A., Perez Gutthann, S., Carson, J. L., Griffin, M., Savage, R., Logan, R., Moride, Y., Hakwey, C., Hill, S., & Fries, J. T. (1996). Variability in risk of gastrointestinal complications with individual non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs: results of a collaborative meta-analysis. Br. Med. J. 312(7046): 1563–1566. 11. Flower, R. J., Vane, J. R. (1972). Inhibition of prostaglandin synthetase in brain explains the anti-pyretic activity of paracetamol (4-acetamidophenol). Nature, 240(5381): 410-13. 12. Kujubu, D. A., Fletcher, B. S., Varnum, B. C., Lim, R. W., & Herschman, H. R. (1991). TIS10, a phorbol ester tumor promoter-inducible mRNA from Swiss 3T3 cells, encodes a novel prostaglandin synthase/ cyclooxygenase homologue. J. Biol. Chem. 266(20), 12866–12872. 13. Xie, W. L., Chipman, J. G., Robertson, D. L., Erikson, R. L., Simmons, D. L. (1991). Expression of mitogen-responsive gene encoding prostaglandin synthase is regulated by mRNA splicing. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 88(7): 2692–2696.

212 14. Fletcher, B. S., Kujubu, D. A., Perrin, D. M., & Herschman, H. R. (1992). Structure of the mitogen-inducible TIS10 gene and demonstration that the TIS10-encoded protein is a functional prostaglandin G/H synthase. J. Biol. Chem 267(7): 4338–4344. 15. O’ Banion, M. K., Winn, V. D., & Young, D. A. (1992). cDNA cloning and functional activity of a glucocorticoid-regulated inflammatory cyclooxygenase. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 89(11): 4888–4892. 16. Warner, T. D., Giuliano, F., Vojnovic, I., Bukasa, A., Mitchell, J. A., & Vane, J. R. (1999). Nonsteroidal drug selectivity’s for cyclo-oxygenase-2 are associated with human gastrointestinal toxicity: a full in vitro analysis. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 96(17): 7563–7568. 17. Turini, M. E., & DuBois, R. N. (2002). Cyclooxygenase-2: a therapeutic target. Annu. Rev. Med. 53: 35–57. 18. Khan, K. N., Paulson, S. K., Verburg, K. M., Lefkowith, J. B., & Maziasz, T. J. (2002). Pharmacology of cyclooxygenase-2 inhibition in the kidney. Kidney Int. 61(4): 1210–1219. 19. Prescott, L. F., & Am., J. Ther. (2000). Paracetamol: past present and future. 7(2): 143–147. 20. Li, S., Wang, Y., Matsumura, K., Ballou, L. R., Morham, S. G., & Blatteis, C. M. (1999). The febrile response to lipopolysaccharide is blocked in cyclooxygenase-2(-/-), but not in cyclooxygenase-1(-/-) mice. Brain Res, 825, 86–94. 21. Luong, C., Miller, A., Barnett, J., Chow, J., Ramesha, C., & Browner, M. F. (1996). Flexibility of the NSAID binding site in the structure of human cyclooxygenase-2. Nat Struct Biol. 1996; 3(11): 927–933. 22. Kurumbail, R. G., Stevens, A. M., Gierse, J. K., McDonald, J. J., Stegeman, R. A., Pak, J. Y., Gildehaus, D., Miyashiro, J. M., Penning, T. D., Seibert, K., Isakson, P. C., & Stallings, W. C. (1996). Structural basis for selective inhibition of cycloxygenase-2 by anti-inflammatory agents. Nature. 384(6610): 644–648. 23. Riendeau, D., Percival, M. D., Boyce, S., Brideau, C., Charleson, S., Cromlish, W., Ethier, D., Evans, J., Falgueyret, J. P., & Ford-Hutchinson, A. W., et al. (1997). Biochemical and pharmacological profile of a tetrasubstituted furanone as a highly selective COX-2 inhibitor. Br J Pharmacol. 121(1): 105–117. 24. Riendeau, D., Percival, M. D., Brideau, C., Charleson, S., Dube, D., Ethier, D., Falgueyret, J. P., Friesen, R. W., Gordon, R., & Greig, G., et al. (2001). Etoricoxib (MK-0663): preclinical profile and comparison with other agents

213 that selectively inhibit cyclooxygenase-2. J Pharmacol Exp Ther 296(2), 558–566. 25. Cao, C., Matsumura, K., Yamagata, K., & Watanabe, Y. (1996). Endothelial cells of the rat brain vasculature express cyclooxygenase-2 mRNA in response to systemic interleukin-1 beta: a possible site of prostaglandin synthesis responsible for fever. Brain Res. 733(2): 263–272. 26. Aronoff, D. M., & Neilson, E. G. (2001). Antipyretics: mechanism of action and clinical use in fever suppression. Am J Med. 2001; 111(4): 304–315. 27. Gordon, S. M., Brahim, J. S., Rowan, J., Kent, A., & Dionne, R. A. (2002). Peripheral prosanoid levels and nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drug analgesia: replicate clinical trials in tissue injury model. Clin Pharmacol Ther. 72(2): 175–183. 28. Samad, T. A., Moore, K. A., Sapirstein, A., Billet, S., Allchorne, A., Poole, S., Bonventre, J. V., & Woolf, C. J. (2001). Interleukin-1beta-mediated induction of COX-2 in the CNS contributes to inflammatory pain hypersensitivity. Nature. 410(6827), 471–475. 29. Svensson, C. I., & Yaksh, T. L. (2002). The spinal phospholipase- cyclooxygenase-prostanoid cascade in nociceptive processing. Annu Rev Pharmacol Toxicol. 42: 553–583.

30. Dougados, M., Behier, J. M., Jolchine, I., Calin, A., van der Heijde, D., Oliveri, I., Zeidler, H., & Herman, H. (2001). Efficacy of celecoxib, a cyclooxygenase 2-specific inhibitor in the treatment of ankylosing spondylitis: a six week controlled study with comparison against placebo and against a conventional nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drug. Arthritis Rheum. 44(1), 180–185.

31. Chang, D. J., Desjardins, P. J., Chen, E., Polis, A. B., McAvoy, M., Mockoviak, S. H., & Geba, G. P. (2002). Comparison of the analgesic efficacy of rofecoxib and enteric-coated diclofenac sodium in the treatment of postoperative dental pain: a randomized, placebo-controlled clinical trial. Clin Ther. 24(4), 490–503.

32. Camu, F., Beecher, T., Recker, D. P., & Verburg, K. M. (2002). Valdecoxib, a COX-2-specific inhibitor, is an efficacious, opioid-sparing analgesic in patients undergoing hip arthroplasty. Am J Ther. 9(1): 43–51.

33. Tanaka, A., Araki, H., Hase, S., Komoike, Y., & Takeuchi, K. (2002). Up- regulation of COX-2 by inhibition of COX-1 in the rat: a key to NSAID- induced gastric injury. (2002) Aliment Pharmacol Ther. 16(2): 90–101.

214 34. Botting, R. (2000). Paracetamol – inhibitable COX-2. J. Physiol. Pharmacol, 51(4 Pt 1): 609–618.

35. FitzGerald, G. A., & Am., J. Cardiol. (2002). Cardiovascular pharmacology of nonselective non steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs and coxibs: clinical consideration. 2002; 89(6A): 26D–32D.

36. Green, K., Drvota, V., & Vesterqvist, O. (1989). Pronounced reduction of in vivo prostacyclin synthesis in humans by acetaminophen (paracetamol). prostaglandins; 37, 311–315.

37. Boutaud, O., Aronoff, D. M., Richardson, J. H., Marnett, L. J., & Oates, J. A. (2002). Determinant of the cellular specificity of acetaminophen as an inhibitor of prostaglandin H(2) synthases. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 99, 7130–7135.

215 Guidelines to Authors

Samyoga invites original, research oriented or theoretical papers, articles and reviews. Given below are the general guidelines for the contributors: • The paper should be typed in MS Word and title of the paper should be followed by authors(s) name, designations, official address, phone number/s and email address. • The manuscripts should be of an average length of 6,000 words. • The manuscript should carry an abstract of about 150-200 words. • British English should be used to write the articles. • Tables and Figures: Tables and figures should appear in the document near/ after where they are referenced in the text. Avoid the use of overly small type in tables • The text should be justified and the tables and graphs should be numbered and centralized • Font Size: 12 pt, Font Type: Times New Roman • Papers are accepted for publication on the understanding that these contain original unpublished work not submitted for publication anywhere else • Fact of papers presented/submitted in a conference/seminar must be clearly mentioned at the bottom of the first page of the manuscript and the author should specify with whom the copyright rests. • Whenever any copyrighted material is used, contributors should accurately reproduce, obtain permission from the copyright holders, and the same should be acknowledged in the article • Reference: The list of reference should be placed at the end of the article and arranged in an alphabetical order on the basis of the surnames. Only the works cited or referred to in the main text should be cited under the reference. Follow the structure of : Author’s name, year of publication, title of the work, place of publication, publishers • Every contribution should be accompanied by a declaration that the article is original and has not been published nor submitted elsewhere for publication • All manuscripts should be in electronic form and sent to:

Executive Editor, Samyoga,T. John Group of Institutions 88/1, Gottigere Post, Bannerghatta Road, Bangalore - 560083 Tel: 91 80 40250555, E-mail: [email protected]

216 217 Subscription Form

Please fill in the coupon with CAPITAL LETTERS and mail it with your Cheque/DD to: Campus Director, T. John Group of Institutions, No. 88/1, Gottegere, Bannerghatta Road, Bangalore 560083. Ph : +91 80 40250555 or email us at: [email protected]

Subscription Details: Annual Subscription: Rs 150/*- (1 Issue)

Yes I want to subscribe to Samyoga, the Annual Journal of T. John Group

Name……………………………………………………………...... Address ……………………………………...... City………………………...... … Pin…………………………...... Tel………………………...... Mobile……………………...... … Email…………...... ……………

I am enclosing Cheque/DD No………………...... ….……Drawn on (bank)…………………….... Dated……………...... …favoring T. John College payable at Bangalore.

Name…………………………...... Signature………………

Please Note: Kindly allow us 4-6 weeks for processing of your subscription. Please write your name and address on the back of the Cheque/DD. (*Inclusive of delivery charges)

218